Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, VECTRA

VECTRA 8 0 - . 7 A 0 0 - 2

7 5 uly dition: J notice. E TS 15 ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by orReproduction or in whole translation, is not in parts, without permitted Ltd. Motors Vauxhall prior consent under written rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws from Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by contained in this and specifications illustrations information, All on the latest based are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any VAUXHALL Vectra

Operation, Safety, Maintenance Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate and in the Service Booklet. Fuel De signation

Engine oil Grade

Viscosity

Tyre pressure T yre size with up to 3 pe ople with fu ll load Summer tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Weights Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight

– EC kerbweight

=Loading Your Vectra Make use of the Owner’s This symbol signifies: is an intelligent combination of forward- Manual: 6 Continue reading on next page. looking technology, impressive safety, z The "In brief" section will give you an 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not environmental friendliness and economy. initial overview. fitted to all vehicles (model variants, It now lies with you to drive your vehicle z The table of contents at the beginning of engine options, models specific to one safely and ensure that it performs the Owner’s Manual and within the country, optional equipment, Genuine perfectly. This Owner’s Manual provides individual chapters will show you where Vauxhall Parts and Accessories). you with all the necessary information to everything is. that end. 9 Warn ing z Its index will help you find what you Make sure your passengers are aware want. Text marked 9 Warning provides of the possible risk of accident and injury z It w ill familiarise you with the information on risk of accident or injury. which may result from improper use of the Disregard of the instructions may lead vehicle. sophisticated technology. to injuries or endanger life. Inform your z You must always comply with the specific It w ill increase your pleasure in your passengers accordingly. laws of the country that you are travelling vehicle. z through. These laws may differ from the It will help you to handle your vehicle Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as information in this Ow ner’s Manual. expertly. points of reference or indicate some action When instructed to consult a w ork shop, The Owner’s Manual is designed to be to be performed. we recommend that you consult your clearly laid-out and easily understood. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. reaction or a second action to be All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide performed. first-class service at reasonable prices. Directional data, e.g. left or right, or front You will receive quick, reliable and or back, in the descriptions always relate to individual service. the direction of travel. Experienced mechanics, trained by Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We Vauxhall, work according to specific wish you many hours of pleasurable Vauxhall instructions. driving. The Owner’s Manual should always be kept Your Vauxhall Team in the vehicle: Ready to hand in the glove compartment.

Commitment to customer In b rief ...... 2 Contents satisfaction: Keys, doors, w indows, sunroof ...... 26 Our ai m: to keep you happy with your Seats, interior ...... 50 vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers Instrum ents, controls ...... 98 offer first-class service at competitive Lighting ...... 128 prices. Experienced, factory-trained Infotainment system ...... 137 technicians work according to factory Clim ate c ontrol ...... 140 instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can Driving and op eration ...... 168 supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL- Self-help, vehicle care ...... 228 APPROVED PARTS, which have undergone stringent quality and precision checks, and Service, maintena nce ...... 268 of course useful and attractive Technical data ...... 282 VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES. Index ...... 314 Our name is your guarantee! For d eta ils of the Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork, please ring this number; 0845 090 2044 2In brief

In brief

To unlock and open vehicle: To unlock an d open the luggage Press button q, pull door handle compartment: 6 Door locks, child safety locks – Press button q on remote con trol, see page 41, press button on boot lid/tailgate keys – see page 26, and for Estate, pull catch electronic immobiliser – see page 27, under handle

re mo te co ntro l – see page 28, 6 Remote control – see page 28,

central locking – see page 30, central locking – see page 30, 3 mechanical anti-theft locking system – Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, see page 30, electrically op erated tailgate 3 – 3 Vauxhall alarm system – see pag e 38. see page 35. In brief 3

To adjust front seats: To adjust front seat backrests: To adjust fron t seat height 3 : Pull handle, slide seat, Turn handwheel Operate lever on outboard side of release handle Move seat backrest to suit seating position. seat 6 Seats – see page 50, Do not lean on seat backrest whilst Pump action of lever seat position – see page 52, adjusting it. Upwards: Seat higher electrically adjustable front seats – Downwards: Seat lower see page 52. 6 Seats – see page 50, seat position – see page 52, 6 Seats – see page 50, 9 Warning folding down front passenger’s seat seat position –see page 52, backrest – see page 66, electrically adjustable front seats – Important: Do not sit nearer than electrically adjustable front seats – see page 52. 10 inches (25 cm ) from the steering see page 52. wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment. 4In brief

Adjusting front seat inclination 3: Electric seat adjustment 3 : To adjust head restraint height 3 Operate front lever on outboard Operate switch on outboard side of front and outboard rear seats: side of seat of seat Press button to release, Pump action of lever 1 Adjusting the longitudinal position adjust height, engage in position 6 Head restraints – see page 55, Upwards: Seat steeper 2 Adjusting the inclination Downwards: Seat flatter head restraint position – see page 56, 3 He ig ht adjus tme nt rear head restraints – see page 55. 6 Seats – see page 50, 4 Seat backrest adjustment seat position – see page 52, 5 Lumbar support 3 electrically adjustable front seats – see page 52. 6 Seats – see page 52, seat position – see page 52, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 52. In brief 5

To adjust head restraint angle 3 To apply seat belt: Adjusting interior mirror: of front and outboard rear seats: Pull out seat belt smoothly from Swivel mirror housing Swivel bottom edge of head inertia reel, guide it over the Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing restraint forwards or backwards shoulder and engage in the to reduce dazzle at night. 6 Head restraints – see page 55, belt buckle 6 Mirror – see page 44, head restraint position – see page 56, The seat belt must not be twisted at any automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3 – rear head restraints – see page 55. point. The lap belt must lie snugly against see page 44. the body. The backrests must not be tilted back too far (recommended maximum tilting angle approx. 25°). To release belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Three-point seat belts – see page 72, airbag systems 3 – see page 81, seat position – see page 52. 6In brief

To adjust exterior mirrors: Steering column lock and ignition: Steering wheel adjustment 3 : Four-way switch in driver’s door Turn key to position 1. Move lever down, If the outer mirror switch (1) is pressed, the Move steering wheel slightly to adjust height and distance, four-way switch operates the driver’s and release steering column lock move lever up, front passenger’s mirrors 3 , and if the inner Positions: engage mirror switch (2 ) is pressed, it only operates 0 = Ignition off Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is the front passenger’s mirror. 1 = Steering free, ignition off stationary and steering column lock is 6 Mirrors – see page 43, 2 = Ignition on, for diesel engines: released. aspherical exterior mirrors 3 – see page 43, Preheating 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81. automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors 3 – 3=Starting see page 43, heated exterior mirrors – see page 13, 6 Starting – see page 15, electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 54. electronic immobiliser – see page 27, parking the vehicle – see page 16. In brief 7

Turn light switch: Headlight flash, main beam and Switch on tu rn signal lights: 7 =Off dipped beam: Right = Stalk up 8 = Parking lights Headlight = Pull stalk Left = Stalk down 9 = Dipped or main beam flash towards steering wheel 6 Turn signal lights – see page 130. AUTO = Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Main beam = Push stalk forwards Press button: Dipped beam = Push stalk > = Front fog lights 3 forwards again r = Fog tail light or pull towards steering wheel 6 Lighting – see page 128, headlight control indicator – 6 Main beam, headlight flash – see pages 100, 126, 128. see page 129. 8In brief In brief 9

Page Pa ge Page 1 Side air v ents ...... 142 10 Windscreen wiper, 19 Ashtrays ...... 94 2 Front pa ssenger’s airbag ...... 81 windscreen wash system, 20 S towa ge c om partment 3 headlight wash system and with AUX input 3 ...... 138 3 Centre air v ents ...... 142 rear window wash system 3 ...... 11 21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket ...... 93 4 Infotainment system 3 ...... 137 11 Pa rking lights, dipped beam ...... 128 22 Clim ate c ontrol ...... 163 5 Central information display for Instrument illumination ...... 134 time, date, outside temperature, Fog tail lig ht ...... 131 23 Heated seat (left) 3 ...... 144 Infotainment system 3, Front fog lights 3 ...... 130 Haz ard warning lights ...... 131 check control 3, Headlight range adjustment 3 ..... 131 Parking distance sensors 3 ...... 202 3 trip computer , 12 Unlock ing the bonnet ...... 228 24 Glove compartment ...... 95, 135 Electronic Climate Control 3 ...... 108 13 Starter switch with steering 25 Fusebox ...... 246 6 Turn signal lights...... 7 colum n lock ...... 6 Headlight flash, dipped beam a nd main beam ...... 7 14 Ac celera tor pedal ...... 184 Door-to-door lighting 3 ...... 133 15 Brake peda l ...... 185, 208 Parking lights ...... 134 16 Steering wheel adjustm ent ...... 6 Cruise control 3 ...... 200 17 Clutch ped al 3 ...... 185 7 Steering wheel remote control 3 .. 137 18 Heated seat (right) 3 and 8 Instruments ...... 98 seat climate control 3 ...... 144 9 Horn ...... 11 Vauxhall alarm system 3 ...... 38 Driver’s airb ag ...... 81 Rear w indow blind 3 ...... 49 and Electronic Stability Programme 3 196 SPORT mode 3 ...... 198 10 In brief

Control indicators t Bulb replac em ent 3, u Anti -lock Bra ke Sy st em (A BS ), O Turn signal lights, see pages 100, 252. see page 210. see pages 7, 98, 130. s Open luggage compartment, p Electro-hydraulic power I Engine oil pressure, see pages 34, 101. assisted steering, see page 98. see page 103. > Front fog lights 3 , R Brak e sy stem , clut ch sy stem, see pages 101, 130. v Electronic Stability Prog ramm e see pages 99, 209, 276. (ESP®Plus) 3 , C Main beam, see pages 103, 196. p Alternator, see pages 7, 101, 128. see page 99. y Seat occupancy recognition 3, r Fog tail light, see pages 87, 103. v Airbag systems 3 , see pages 101, 131. belt tensioners 3, S Engine oil level 3 , 3 see pages 74, 86. r Parking distance sensors , see pages 103, 272. see pages 101, 202. Coola nt temperature, m Cruise control 3, W 3 see pages 100, 106. u Continuous Damping Control , see page 200. SPORT m ode, 8 Exterior lights, see pages 101, 198. Y Fuel level, see pages 100, 128. see pages 103, 106, 228. X Seat belt 3, 1 SPORT mode of autom atic see page 101. Z Exhaust gases 3, tra nsm ission 3, see pages 104, 192. see pages 100, 178, 179. A Engine electronics, transmission elect ronics 3, diesel fuel filter 3 , w Tyre pressure monitoring T Winter programme of immob iliser, system 3, autom atic transmission 3 or see pages 27, 101, 192. see pages 104, 204. Easytronic 3, see pages 100, 172, 180. ! Preheating for diesel engines 3, B Adaptive Forward Lighting diesel p artic le filter 3, (AFL) 3, ( Door open 3, see pages 102, 194. see pages 104, 132. see page 100. H Coolant level, j Easytronic 3, see pages 102, 275. starting the engine 3, see pages 100, 169. In brief 11

Hazard warning lights: Activate horn: Windscreen wiper: On = Press ¨ Press j in centre of steering Gently push stalk upwards Off = Press ¨ again wh eel § =Off 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81, $ 6 Hazard w arning lights – see page 131. = Adjustable timed remote control on steering wheel 3 – interval wipe see page 137. % =Slow & =Fast Press the stalk down from position §: Single swipe. 6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, adjustable wiper interval 3 – see page 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehicle care – see page 264. 12 In brief

Automatic wiping with rain Operating windscreen and Operating rear window wiper 3 sensor 3: headlight wash systems 3 : and wash systems 3 : Gently push stalk upwards Pull stalk towards steering wheel Wiper on = Push stalk § =Off 6 Windscreen wash system and headlight forwards $ = Automatic wiping with wash system 3 – see page 127, Wiper off = Push stalk further information – see pages 264, 278. ra in senso r forwards again Automatic wiping $: W ash = H old sta lk in fully Low sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel forwards position to the left 6 Rear window wiper 3 and rear window High sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel wash 3 systems – see page 127, to the right further information – see pages 264, 277, 278. 6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehicle care – see page 264. In brief 13

Heated rear window, To demist or defrost windows: Setting automatic mode of heated exterior mirrors: Set air distribution to l, Electronic Climate Control 3: On = Press Ü turn rotary knob for temperature Press AUTO button, Off = Press Ü again and airflo w clockwise; set temp era ture for d river’s and front passenger’s sides using 6 Air conditioning 3 – see page 140, Air conditioning system 3: left and right rotary knobs Press buttons n and V; heated rear window, heated exterior 6 Electronic Climate Control 3 – mirrors – see page 143. Automatic air conditioning see page 156. system 3: Press buttons n and V, turn rotary knob for temperature clockwise, airflow to A; Electronic Climate Control 3: Press button V 6 Climate control – see page 140. 14 In brief

Manual transmission: Easytronic 3 : Automatic transmission 3 : Reverse gear: with vehicle stationary, pull N=Idling P=Park position the ring up three seconds after depressing o =Drive position R = Reverse gear clutch pedal and engage gear. + = Higher gear N = Neutral position (idling) If the gear does not engage, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and - = Lower gear D = Automatic gear selection depress again; then repeat gear selection. A/M = Switch between Selector lever in D to the left: Automatic and Manual Manual mode mode +=Higher gear R=Reverse gear (with -=Lower gear selector lev er lock) P or N must be engaged when starting. The selector lever must always be moved in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it automatically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode indicator in the transmission display. The footbrake must be depressed when starting. 6 Easytronic 3 – see page 168. In brief 15

In order to leave P, switch on ignition, Before sta rting -o ff, check : depress footbrake and press button on z Tyre pressure and condition – selector lever. see pages 204, 211, 299. To engag e P or R, press button on selector z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine lever. compartment – see pages 271 to 279. P Only with vehicle stationary, apply ha nd brake beforehand. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and number plates are free from dirt, R Only if vehicle is stationary. snow and ice and are operational. 6 Automatic transmission 3 – z No objects are placed in front of the rear see page 176. window, on the instrument panel or in the area in w hich the airbags inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. To start engine: z Brake operation. Op era te clutch and b rak e ped als, automatic transmission 3 in P or N, Easytronic 3: Depress brake, do not accelerate, Petrol engines: Turn key to 3; Diesel eng ines: Turn key to 2, when control indicator ! goes out1), tu rn key to 3; release key once engine is running To restart or switch off the engine, turn key back to 0. To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2. 6 Electronic immobiliser – see page 27, diesel fuel system – see page 228.

1) Preheating system switches on only if outside temperature is low. 16 In brief

Parking the vehicle z Lock the doors and luggage z Always apply the handbrake firmly compartment and activate the Vauxhall without pressing the release button; alarm system 3 by pressing button p on to do this, fold up the armrest 3. Apply the remote control. handbrake as fully as possible on an To activate the mechanical anti-theft uphill or downhill incline. To reduce the locking system 3 , press button p again amount of force required to activate the no more than 15 seconds after locking. handbrake, depress the footbrake at the same time. Advice when parking: z Switch off the engine; to do this, turn the z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable ignition key to 0. Remove the ignition key surfaces, since the hot exhaust system and turn the steering wheel until the temperatures could cause the surfa ce to s t ee r in g co lu m n lo ck (an t i-t h e ft ignite. protection) engages. In vehicles with z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 , control Releasing the handbrake: automatic transmission 3, the key ca n indicator R flashes for a few seconds Raise lever slightly, only be removed when the selector lever after the ignition is switched off if the press release button, is in P. ha nd brake ha s not be en a pplied – lower lever fully z If the vehicle is parked on a flat surface see page 174. 6 Handbrake – see page 209. or an uphill incline, engage first gear z Close windows and sunroof 3 . before switching off the ignition if you have manual transmission or z The engine cooling fans may run after Easytronic 3 ; if the vehicle has the engine has been switched off – automatic transmission 3, place the see page 271. selector lever in P. On an uphill incline, 6 Remote control – see page 28, also turn the front wheels away from the central locking – see page 30, kerb. Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, If the vehicle is on a downhill incline, vehicle decommissioning – see page 281. engage reverse gear before switching off the ignition if you have manual transmission or Easytronic 3; if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3, place the selector lever in P. Also turn the front wheels towards the kerb. In brief 17

That was a brief overview of the most imp ortant in forma tion for your first drive in your vehicle.

The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the interesting functions in your vehicle.

The rema in ing ch apters of the Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index. 18 In brief

Airbag system Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3 The airbag system consists of several The side airbag system triggers when a The curtain airbag system triggers in the separate systems. side-on collision occurs and provides a event of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier for the driver and/or front safety barrier in the head area on the Front airbag system passenger in the respective front door re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s The front airbag system will be triggered in area. This reduces the risk of injury to the the risk of injury to the head considerably in the event of a serious accident involving a upper body considerably, in the event of a the event of a side-on collision. frontal impact and forms safety cushions side-impact. for the driver and front passenger. 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head are thereby substantially reduced. In brief 19

Active head restraints 3 at front Operating menus in th e Selection using multi-function knob: seats information display 3 Rotate and press multi-function knob. In the event of a rear-impact, the active Menu options are selected using menus To exit a menu, turn the multi-function head restraints tilt forwards a little. The and using the buttons/four-way button knob left or right to Return or Main and head is more effectively supported by the or the multi-function knob of the select. head restraint and the danger of injuries Infotainme nt sy ste m 3 or th e left-h an d caused by whiplash in the neck area is adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. reduced. The respective menu options are shown Active head restraints are identified by the on th e dis play. lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint To select with four-way button: guide sleeves. Press the four-way button up, down, right 6 Head restraints – see page 55. or left. 20 In brief

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 BC 1 All values BC 2 257.0 miles Coolant level Timer 1 Ø40mph check Tyr es 7.0 ga l . 8 Ø 31.0 miles/ gal. OK

Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on Trip computer 3 Check control 3 steering wheel: The trip computer provides information on The check control software monitors: Rotate and press adjuster wheel. driving data, which is continually recorded z Fluid le vels, 6 Information display – see page 108. and evaluated electronically. z Tyre pressures 3 , Functions: z Range, z Remote control battery, z Instantaneous consumption, z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Distance travelled, z Average speed, z Important exterior lights, including z Effective consumption, cables and fuses. z Average consumption, 6 Check control 3 – see page 124. z Stop watch, z Tyre pressure 3. 6 Trip computer 3 – see pages 114, 120. In brief 21

Remote control on steering Twin Audio 3 FlexOrganizer 3 wheel 3 Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants The side walls contain retaining strips, The functions of the Infotainment system 3 with the opportunity to listen to a different where various components can be and the information display can be audio source than the one selected by the attached to divide the luggage operated with the buttons and adjuster driver on the Infotainment system 3 . compa rtm ent or fasten loads. wheels on the steering wheel. Only an audio source that is not currently The sy ste m consists of: Further information is available in the active on the Infotainment system can be z Variable partition net, Infotainment system operating controlled using Twin Audio. z Variable partition wall, z instructions. Two headphone connections are available, Partition rod, z Mesh pockets for the side walls, 6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 – with separate volume controls. z Hooks. see page 137, Further information is available in the 6 3 Infotainment system – see page 137. Infotainme nt sy ste m ope ra ting Fle xO rg aniz er – see page 69. instructions. 6 Twin Audio 3 – see page 138. 22 In brief

Curve lighting The Xenon light beam pivots based on steering wheel position and vehicle speed, from approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Turn lig hting An additional light illuminates at certain steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds up to approx. 25 mph (40 km/h). The light beam projects at a 90° angle to Travel Assistant 3 Adaptive Forward Lighting the left or right of the vehicle up to a distance of approx. 30 metres. The Travel Assistant contains: (AFL) 3 z Arm re s t, On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL Motorway lighting z Stowage compartments, improves illumination of: At higher speeds and continuous straight z Waste container, ahead travel, the dipped beam z z Drink holders, Curves (curve lighting), automatically raises slightly, thereby z Acc essory socke ts, z Intersections and tight turns (turn increasing headlight range. z Connection console lighting). 6 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 – e.g. for DVD player 3, see page 132. z Elec tric cool box, z Foldaway tables, z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartment. The Travel Assistant is installed on a console above the centre seat in the rear. 6 Travel Assistant 3 – see page 58. In brief 23

Ü Board Computer

BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyr es

Parking distance sensors 3 SPORT mode 3 Tyre pressure monitoring When reverse gear is selected, the parking To activate system 3 distance sensors switch on automatically. Pre ss th e SPORT button. The LED in the The tyre pressure monitoring system The parking distance sensors can also be button illuminates. continuously monitors the pressure of all activated at speeds of less than 15 mph SPORT mode is used to change four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel. the instrument panel. and the shifting times and shifting points The tyre pressures of the individual tyres 3 If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to fo r E as ytro nic and automatic are transmitted to a controller, where they 3 the front or rear, a series of signals is transmission whilst driving. are compared. audible in the vehicle interior. The interval Damping and steering 3 become more The current tyre pressures can be be twee n the signals become s shorter a s direct and provide better contact with the displayed on the Graphical Information the distance is reduced. If the distance is road surface. The engine reacts more Display or the Colour Information less than 30 cm, the signal will be quickly to accelerator movements. Display 3. continuous. With automatic transmission 3, the shift Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in 6 Parking distance sensors 3 – times are reduced and gear changes occur the form of messages on the information see page 202. at higher engine speeds (not when cruise display whilst driving. control 3 is active). 6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – 6 SPORT mode 3 – see page 198. see page 204. 24 In brief

z To close: –Hold down the r button on the remote control until the tailgate is closed. - or - – When the key is inserted in the starter switch and the handbrake is applied, hold down the x button in the driver’s door until the tailgate is shut. - or - –Press the F button in the tailgate. 6 Electrically operated tailgate 3 – see page 35. Electrically operated tailgate, Towing equipment with pivoting Estate 3 coupling ball bar 3 z To op en : The release lever is in the left stowage compartment in the luggage – Hold down remote control button r compartment. Open cover. (see page 35, Fig. 17548 J) for approx. z Pull release lever downwards. 1second. – The LED on the lever is illuminated w hile - or - the coupling ball bar is not engaged. – When the key is inserted in the starter – In addition, a warning buzzer sounds switch and the handbrake is applied, and the coupling ball bar pivots hold down the x button in the driver’s downwards. door for approx. 1 second. z Pivot the coupling ball bar backw ards - or - until it engages. – LED must extinguish, – Unlock the tailgate and open by pulling – Warning buzzer must cease, the catch beneath the handle. – Otherwise, repeat the procedure. 6 Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 – see page 222. In brief 25

Diesel particle filter 3 The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes polluting soot particles out of the engine exhaust gases. The system includes a self-cleaning function that operates automatically whilst driving. The filter is cleaned by burning the trapped soot particles at a high temperature. There may be an increase in fuel consumption, exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan operation 3 during the self-cleaning operation. The self-cleaning function cannot operate automatically during certain driving situations where the engine does not reach If the filter needs cleaning and rec ent its normal operating temperature. driving situations did not allow the function An example of this would be driving only to automatically operate, then control short distances in cold weather. indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle will not be damaged and does not require service. The self-cleaning function will automatically operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its normal operating temperature. Control indicator ! will continue to flash until the self-cleaning operation is complete. This may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher vehicle spe eds. 6 Diesel particle filter 3 – see page 194. 26 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Keys, doors, windows, Replacement keys The key number is specified in the vehicle sunroof documents and in the Car Pass 3. The key is a constituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Replacem ent keys ...... 26 Authorised Repairer guarantees problem- Loc k cylinders ...... 26 free operation of the electronic Ca r Pass 3 ...... 26 immobiliser. Key with foldaw ay key section 3 ...... 26 Keep the spare key in a safe place. Electronic immobiliser...... 27 Locks - see page 266. Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the remote control.... 28 Lock cylinders Remote control ...... 28 Designed to free-wheel if they are Central locking system ...... 30 forcefully rotated without the correct key or Key with foldaway key section 3 Fault when locking or unlocking...... 33 if the correct key is not fully inserted. Press button to extend. Press button to Luggage compartment ...... 34 To reset, turn cylinder with the correct key retract and audibly engage key section. Vauxhall alarm system 3...... 38 until its slot is vertical, remove key and then Child safety locks ...... 41 re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, Universal remote control in mirror turn the key through 180° and repeat hous ing 3...... 41 op eration . Exterior mirrors...... 43 Interior mirror ...... 44 Car Pass 3 Electric windows 3 ...... 45 The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s Wind ow s in rear doors ...... 47 data and should therefore not be k ept in Sunroof 3 ...... 47 the vehicle. Electrically operated rear window Have your Car Pass to hand when blind 3 ...... 49 cons ulting a V aux hall Authoris ed Re pairer. Sunblinds for rear door windows 3 .... 49 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 27

If control indicator A illuminates after the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine elec tronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 101, 174, 182, 192) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 (see page 274). Note The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see pages 30, 38.

Electronic immobiliser Control indicator for imm obiliser The system checks whether the vehicle may Control indica tor A illuminates briefly be started using the key that has been when the ig nition is sw itched on. inserted. If the k ey is recognised as If the control indicator flashes when the "authorised" the vehicle can be started. ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; The check is carried out via a transponder the engine cannot be started. Switch off in the key. the ignition and then repeat the start The electronic immobiliser activates attempt. automatically when the key is removed If the control indicator A continues to from the starter switch. flash, try to start the engine using the spare The c od e number of the electronic key and contact a workshop for assistance. immobiliser is given in the Car Pass. 28 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Store and activate personal The remote control has a range of approx. vehicle settings using the remote 5 metres. This rang e ca n be a ffected by control outside influences. Aim the remote control at the vehicle to operate. The last settings selected for: z Instrument illumination, Handle the remote control with care, protect it from moisture and high z Central locking, temperatures and avoid unnecessary z Memory function 3 for driver’s seat operation. and mirror, The hazard warning lights illuminate to z Electronic Climate Control 3 indicate that the remote control is operational. are automatically stored depending on the vehicle key used . Centra l locking system, see page 30. Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote control will Remote control Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 , activate the settings associated with it. The remote control is integrated in the key. see page 30. The settings for five remote controls can be Used to operate: Boot lid or tailgate, stored. z Central locking system, see page 34. z Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 , Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Vauxhall alarm system 3, see page 38. z Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3. Electric windows 3 , In addition, electric windows 3 and electric see page 45. sunroof 3 can be closed using the remote control. Electrica lly op era ted sunroof 3, see page 47. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 29

Fault Make sure that you dispose of old batteries If the central locking system cannot be in accordance with environmental operated with the remote control, it may be protection regulations. due to the following: Remote control synchronisation z The range of the remote control has After a battery change, unlock door with been exceeded. key in lock - see page 33. Inserting the key z Remote control battery voltage is too into the lock synchronises the remote low. Battery replacement - see next control. column. z Frequent, repeated operation of the remote control outside the reception range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control Rem ote control b attery rep lacement synchronisation – see end column. Replace the battery as soon as the range z If the central locking system is of the remote control becomes reduced. overloaded as a result of repeated Extending the key – see page 26. operation at short intervals. The power supply is cut off for a brief period. Open the remote control. Replace the battery (battery type – see page 307), z Interference from higher-power radio noting installation position. Close the waves from other sources. re mo te co ntro l. To eliminate the cause of a fault, we recommend contacting a workshop for assistance. Manual unlocking and locking using the vehicle key - see page 33. 30 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Central locking system To lock Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap. Press button p on remote control. 9 Warnin g To unlock Press button q on remote control. Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle. The doors cannot be unlocked from inside.

All doors must be closed. Press button p on remote control again no more than 15 se conds afte r locking. Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such that doors cannot be opened. If the ignition was on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 31

Programming unlocking mode 3 Autom atic locking 3 When the vehicle is delivered from the The central locking can be set to lock factory, the remote control is preset so that automatically at a certain speed. q a single press of the button opens all of To activate the function, hold button p on the doors and the luggage compartment. the remote control and button m in the The unit can be configured so that a single driver’s door depressed simultaneously q press of the button unlocks the entire until a double buzzer sounds. vehicle or just the driver’s door. The doors and luggage compartment are Change to presetting: unlocked by switching off the ignition or by q Hold button on the remote control and pressing button ) or, for Estate with m button in the driver’s door depressed electrically op erated tailgate 3, b y simultaneously until a double buzzer pressing button m in the driver’s door. sounds. Afterwards, only the driver’s door Individual doors can be unlocked by q will be unlocked when button is pressed pulling the lock button. once. Central locking sw itch for loc king a nd unlocking the doors from inside the To deactivate the function, hold button p The entire vehicle is then unlocked by on the remote control and button m in the q vehicle pressing button on the remote control driver’s door depressed simultaneously twice. Press button m in the driver’s door: Doors and luggage compartment are until a buzzer sounds. To restore the original settings, hold locked. The current setting is stored for the remote q button on the remote control and control - see page 28. button m in the driver’s door depressed Press button ) in the driver’s door: simultaneously until a buzzer sounds. Doors and luggage compartment are unlocke d. The current setting is stored for the remote control - see page 28. In the Estate with electrically operated tailgate 3, the doors and luggage compartment are locked and unlocked with button m. When the mechanical anti-theft locking sy ste m is active 3 (see page 30), the doors cannot be unlocked with this button. If the vehicle is locked using the remote control, buttons m and ) in the driv er’s door are inoperable. 32 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Note The electric windows 3 can be closed from z If the driver’s door is not closed properly, outside: hold down button p on the the central locking system will unlock remote control until all windows are closed. again immediately after locking. The sunroof 3 can be closed from outside: z 30 seconds after unlocking using the hold down button p on the remote control remote control, the doors automatically until the roof is fully closed. 3 lock again if neither a door nor the Vehicle with electrically retrac ta ble luggage compartment has been exterior mirrors 3: op ened. When closing the windows using the z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to remote control, the exterior mirrors will also prevent undesired access from outside), be retracted. The mirrors will be folded press the central locking button m. back out when the vehicle is unlocked using z If they are locked, the doors and the the remote control. luggage compartment unlock Closing the windows 3 and sunroof 3 If the mirrors are retracted using the button automatically in the event of an accident from outside using the remote contr ol in the driver’s door, they remain in this of a certain severity (to permit outside position when the doors are unlocked. assistance ). Prere quisite : Ignition must 9 Warning not be switched off. Take care when operating the electric windows 3 and the sunroof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly. Keep a close watch on the windows and sunroof when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 33

Automatic closing 3 Ma lfunction in centra l locking system If the mechanical anti-theft locking To unlock: system 3 is activated, the electric Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn windows 3 and sunroof 3 are towards front of vehicle as far as it will go. automatically closed and the electrically Turn key back to a vertical position and retractable exterior mirrors 3 are remove. The other doors can be unlocked automatically retracted as soon as the rain by pulling the interior lock button (unless sensor 3 detects water on the windscreen. the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 To safeguard the battery from discharge has been enabled). The luggage by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the compartment and the tank flap electric windows 3 and sunroof 3 are remain locked. automatically closed and the electrically To lock: retractable exterior mirrors 3 are Lock front passenger’s door and rear doors automatically retracted. by pressing the interior lock button. Lock driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key For further information on electric Fault when locking or unlocking towards rear of vehicle as far as it will go, windows 3 and the sunroof 3 – Rem ote control fa ult turn key to a vertical position and remove. see pages 47, 49. To un lock: Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn The unlocked tank flap and the luggage Fault compartment cannot be locked. If the central locking system cannot be towards front of vehicle as far as it will go. Turn key b ack to v ertical position a nd operated with the remote control, it may be due to the following: remove from lock. Unlock driver’s door with central locking switch - see page 31. z The central locking system is overloaded as a result of repeated operation at short The mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 is deactivated when the key is inserted in intervals. The power supply is cut off for a brief period. the starter switch. To lock : z Defective fuse in fusebox – seepage246. Open front passenger’s door, close driver’s door, lock vehicle using central locking Seek the assistance of a workshop to rectify switch (see page 31), close front the cause of the fault. To open the driver’s passenger’s door. door with the key - see the following section. 34 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Luggage compartment To op en To close To unlock The luggage compartment of the Saloon / There is a handle on the inside of the Press button q on remote control. Hatch is opened by pressing the button, boot lid/tailgate for closing the luggage and the luggage compartment of the compartment. Estate is opened by pulling the catch With the Estate, do not operate the catch beneath the handle. beneath the handle when closing, Illumination of control indicator s otherwise the luggage compartment will indicates that the boot lid/tailgate is open. be unlocked again. For notes on open boot lid/tailgate - see page 37. Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3 – see next page. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 35

Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3 In Estate vehicles with an electrically op erated tailgate, the tailga te can b e electrica lly opened and c losed after unlocking. 9 Warning

Make sure there is more than 2 metres clearance before operating the electric tailgate. Observe the pivoting zone of the tailgate during operation and do not enter the pivoting zone.

To lock To op en : Briefly press button r on the remote Press button p on the remote control Unlock the vehicle by pressing button q on control to unlock the tailgate (the doors – or – the remote control; the tailgate is opened remain locked.) The tailgate is opened Press central locking button m in d r iv er ’s electrically by pulling the catch beneath electrically by pulling the catch beneath door when the doors are closed. the handle. the ha ndle . – or – – or – Hold down button r on the remote control for more than 1 second (the doors remain locked); the tailgate is unlocked and opens electrically – or –

6 36 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

With the key in the starter switch and the To clos e : Press button F in the tailgate; the tailgate handbrake applied, hold button x in Hold down button r on the remote control closes electrically. the driver’s door depressed for approx. until the tailgate is closed. To lock, press button p on the remote 1 second; the tailgate opens electrically. – or – control. Hold down button x in the driver’s door when the k ey is inserted in the starter Tailgate opening and closing is indicated switch until the tailgate is closed. by the rear turn signal lights flashing three – or – times. If the luggage compartment is not closed within 20 minutes of opening, the button in the tailgate is deactivated. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 37

Interruption of tailgate opening/closing Safety function Open boot lid, open tailgate procedure The tailgate has an obstruction detection The opening or closing process is facility. If the tailgate encounters 9 Warnin g immediately interrupted by: resistance during the automatic closing briefly pressing button x in the driver’s movement, the closing procedure is Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate door, stopped immediately and the tailgate is open or ajar, e.g . when transporting – or – slowly opened again. bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas r could penetrate the interior. button on the remote control, Vehicles with towing equipment 3: – or – When towing a caravan/trailer, the Also, the number plate of the Estate the external button beneath the handle, tailgate cannot be operated using cannot be clearly read unless the – or – button r on the remote control or luggage compartment is closed. F button in the tailgate. button x in the driver’s door. The tailgate remains in this position for Fault in electrically operated tailgate Fitting accessories to the boot lid/tailgate 10 se cond s a nd the n slowly reope ns. If the electronic drive should fail, the will increase its weight. If it becomes too tailg ate can be op ened and closed heavy, the boot lid/tailgate w ill then not manually, although more force is required stay open. to close the tailgate. Opening the tailgate when the doors are locked via the central locking system If the doors are loc ked via the central locking system, the tailgate can be opened by pressing button r on the remote control and pulling the catch beneath the handle. 38 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Vauxhall alarm system 3 Monitors: z Doors, luggage compartment, bonnet, z Passenger compartment, z Vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z Ignition.

To activate Activation without monitoring of All doors, windows, the sunroof 3 and the passenger compartment and vehicle tilt bonnet must be closed. Press button p on Activate e.g. when animals are left in the the remote control. vehicle. If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s 1. Close boot lid/tailgate and bonnet. door must be opened and closed again so 2. Press button Ä; LED in button flashes that the anti-theft alarm system can be (maximum of 10 seconds). activated again. 3. Close doors. 4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system. LED illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds, the system is activated without monitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until system is switched off. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 39

After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED flashes =System switched on. slowly z LED illuminates = Switch-off function. for approx. 1second If a system fault occurs, contact a work shop for assistance.

Light emitting d iode (LED) To deactivate During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft Press button q on the remote control alarm system activation: – or – turn on the ignition. z LE D = Test, switch-on delay. illu min at e s If there is a fault in the remote control, z LE D flashe s = Door, luggage unlock vehicle as described on page 33. quickly compartment or If the alarm is triggered w hen the driver’s bonnet open, or door is opened, deactivate the anti-theft system fault. alarm sy ste m by sw itc hing on the ignition. 40 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

3. After the luggage compartment is Ala rm siren with integrated b attery 3 closed, monitoring of the passeng er The alarm siren monitors the on-board compartment, luggage compartment voltage network and triggers an alarm if and vehicle tilt is reactivated after a this network is manipulated (e.g. if the 5 minute delay and the tailgate is vehicle’s battery is disconnected by locked. To override the delay, press unauthorised persons). The alarm siren has button p on the remote control. its own power supply and is therefore not Note dependent on the vehicle’s battery. z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as If the vehicle’s battery is to be the use of ex tra seat covers, could imp air disconnected (e.g. for maintenance work), the function of passeng er comp artm ent the alarm siren must be deactivated as monitoring. follows: switch the ignition on then off, z Disable passenger compartment disconnect the vehicle’s battery within monitoring if the vehicle interior is being 15 se conds. Estate with electrically operated heated. To switch off alarm siren: tailgate 3 : Switch ignition on then off. To open and close the luggage Alarm compartment when the anti-theft An alarm can be triggered whilst the anti- alarm system is active: theft alarm system is active, indicated by: z an acoustic signal (horn) and 1. Briefly press button r on the remote z a visual signal (hazard w arning lights). control – luggage compartment is unlocked (see page 34), and monitoring The number of alarms and the duration of the passenger compartment and thereof are stipulated by law. vehicle tilt is disabled. The alarm can be silenced by pressing a 2. Open luggage compartment – button on the remote control or by seepage34. switching on the ignition. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated at the same time. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 41

The programmed universal remote control can replace the individual remote control units of the sy ste ms to be ope rated . Three buttons on the underside of the mirror housing can be used to operate various systems. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer for details on compatible systems. 9 Warnin g

Ensure that no persons, animals or objects are in the movement zone of the system to be operated (e.g. a garage Child safety lo cks Universal remote control in mirror door). Vehicle pa ssengers m ust be informed of the hazards. housing 3 9 Warning To operate up to 3 different remotely- operated systems (e.g. garage door, Basic programming of the universal Use the child safety locks whenever domestic alarm system, domestic exterior remote control system children are occupying the rear seats. lighting). 1. Switch on ignition. Disregard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers must 2. When programming for the first time, be informed accordingly. press both outer buttons on the mirror housing, until the control indicator alongside the buttons flashes rapidly Turn rotary knob near rear door lock from (after approx. 20 seconds). the vertical position using key; door cannot be opened from inside. 3. Hold the manual remote control unit at a distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control button area of the mirror housing. 42 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

4. Press the button on the manual remote Programming the universal remote Reprogramming individual button control unit while pressing and holding control system for variable code systems settings the desired button of the universal 1. Perform basic programming – If a button that has already been re mo te co ntro l. see previous page. programm ed is to b e used for a different 5. The control indicator in the mirror 2. Activate synchronisation mode of system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic housing will flash slowly at first. As soon system (see system manufacturer’s programming procedure described as it flashes rapidly, release both operating manual) and briefly press the previously. buttons. The universal remote control pre-programmed button on the Clearing all programmed button settings system is now programmed for the universal remote control three times Before selling the vehicle, it is a good idea chosen system. within 30 seconds. to erase button settings. 6. To programme other buttons with other 3. The universal remote control system is Button settings can only be erased all at systems, repeat steps 3 to 5. now programmed for variable code once. It is not possible to erase individual If a system cannot be operated after systems. To programme other systems button settings. Buttons can, however, be repeated programming, and the control for variable codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 individually reprogrammed - see indicator flashes rapidly for a short time for the other buttons on the universal "Reprogramming individual button after the relevant button has been pressed remote control. settings". and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the Using the universal remote control system In order to erase the programming of all receiver may be equipped with a variable With the ignition on, press the required 3 buttons, press both outer buttons and code sy ste m - se e ne xt column. universal remote control button and the release as soon as the LED begins to flash control indicator in the mirror housing will (after approx. 20 seconds). All button illuminate. The pre-programm ed system settings have now been cleared and can can now be operated using the universal be programmed anew at any time. remote control system. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 43

Note Keep replaced manual transmitters for possible reprogramming. The manual transmitters can also continue to be used. If, after repeated attempts at execution of the a bove steps, a system cannot b e actuated with the universal remote control, seek the assistance of a workshop. During programming, the vehicle should be within the range of the receiver. Under no circumstances should the vehicle be in the movement zone of a system (e.g. garage door). Do not programme a system without an Exterior mirrors Swinging in exterior mirror automatic safety stop (manufactured Adjusting exterior mirrors 3 Manually: The exterior mirrors can be before April 1982). Adjustment using the four-way switch in folded in by gently pressing the outer edge Take note of the system manufacturer’s the driver’s door: If the outer mirror switch of the housing. safety instructions for drives and manual (1 ) is pressed, the four-way switch operates Electrically 3 (both mirror switches must remote control units. the driver’s and front passenger’s not be latched into position): mirrors 3. If the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, it only operates the front Push four-way switch to the right: outside rear view mirrors swivel in. passenger’s mirror. The glass of the mirror is adjusted in the Push four-way switch to the left: outside rear view mirrors swivel out. relevant direction in accordance with the operation of the four-way switch. Return the mirrors to the driving position before starting-off. Electrical seat adjustment with Memory function 3: The mirrors can be retracted from the If the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, the outside: Press button p on the remote front passenger-side exterior mirror is control approx. 1 second. The mirrors will pointed automatically at the rear tyres be extended the next time the vehicle is after reverse gear is engaged, in order to unlocked. assist parking (not if towing a caravan/ Swivelling only allowed at speeds of up to 3 trailer) . 4 mph (7 km/h). 44 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Automatic anti- dazzle exterior mirror 3 on the d river’s side Dazzle from following vehicles at night is automatically reduced. The mirror does not reduce dazzle when: z the ignition is switched off, z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a door is open.

For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior Interior mirror mirrors will swing out of their normal To adjust, swivel mirror housing. mounting position if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing applying slight pressure to the mirror to reduce dazzle from following vehicles at housing. night. Aspherical exterior mirror 3 The aspherical mirror glass makes the blind angle smaller. The curvature makes objects look smaller, making it more difficult to estimate how far away following vehicles are. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 45

Electric win dows 3 9 Warning

Take care when operating the electric windows. Risk of injury, especially for children. Vehicle occupants should be informed accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the elec tric wind ow s. Keep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move. Autom atic a nti-dazzle interior mir ror 3 Operation via 2 rocker buttons in the Dazzle from following vehicles at night is driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in The electric windows can be used: automatically reduced. the front passenger’s door and the rear z 3 The sensor is located at the bottom of with ignition on, doors . the housing. In the case of vehicles with z within 10 minutes of switching ignition To operate window in stages, tap switch. a position memory for electrically operated off, For automatic opening or closing, keep front se ats 3 or a universal remote z within 10 minutes of opening or closing switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop control 3, the sensor is located at the the driver’s door, window movement, tap switch again. top right of the mirror glass. z within 10 minutes of inserting or T h e m irro r d oe s n ot re du ce dazzle wh en : removing the ignition key. z the ignition is switched off, Readiness for operation stops when the z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever vehicle is locked. set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a door is open. 46 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Vehicles with rea r electric wind ow s 3 have Child safety system for rear windows 3 Closing windows from outside using the a slide switch between the buttons in the Switch z in the driver’s door remote control 3 driver’s door z Press (switch z illuminates in red): rear The wind ow s c an be clos e d from outside z Up: windows cannot be operated using the using the remote control: p The front windows can be operated buttons in the rear doors, Depress the button until the windows are closed. using the buttons. z press again (switch z no longer z Down : illuminates in red): rear w indows can be The rear windows can be operated using operated using the buttons in the rear the buttons. doors. Safety function If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing, it is immediately stopped and the window opened again. If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on account of frost), keep pressing the switch for the window in question until the window has been closed in stages. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 47

Autom atic c losing 3 Sunroof 3 See page 33. Overload 9 Warnin g If the windows are repeatedly operated at short intervals, the power supply is briefly Caution when operating the sunroof. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle cut off. passe ng ers must be informed The system is protected by fuses in the accordingly. fusebox – see page 246. Keep a close watch on the sliding roof Fault when closing it. Ensure that nothing If the windows cannot be opened and becomes trapped as it moves. closed automatically, activate the window electronics as follows: The electric sunroof can be operated 1. Close doors. z with ignition on, 2. Switch on ignition. Windows in rear doors Tu rn cran k 3 towards the front or rear. z within 10 minutes of switching ignition 3. Window completely open. off, 4. Close window and press on button for at z within 10 minutes of opening or closing le ast 3 se conds. the driver’s door, 5. Repeat for each window. z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked. 48 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

To rais e Turn the rotary switch to any position between d and e. The sunroof will automatically move to the desired position. When the rotary switch is in position e, the sunroof is fully raised. To lowe r Turn rotary switch to d. Position memory After the ignition has been switched on, the sunroof can be automatically returned to its last position by briefly pressing the ro tary sw itc h.

Operated using rotary switch in the Safety function Closing sunroof from outside overhead control panel. If the sunroof encounters resistance during To close the sunroof from outside with the automatic closing, it is immediately remote control: Press button p until the To open stopped and opened again, as long as the sunroof is closed. Turn the rotary switch to any position vehicle is stationary. between d and ü. The sunroof will If the electric windows 3 are to be closed automatically move to the desired position. 9 Warning from outside the vehicle, but the sunroof is When the switch is in position ü , the to be left open, briefly press the rotary sunroof is fully opened. If when the vehicle is being driven the switch before switching off the ignition. Com fort position sunroof encounters resistance during Autom atic closing 3 Set rotary switch to position f. With the automatic closing, because of the higher See page 33. roof in this position, w ind noise is reduced. closing forces involved the protective function cannot be guaranteed, and To close: there is a risk of injury. Turn rotary switch to d.

If the sunroof movement is stiff, e.g. due to frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it pressed until the sunroof is closed. Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 49

Sunshade To reduce the sunlight in the interior with the sliding roof closed or raised. Open or close sunshade as required. When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade is also op ened. Overload If the system is overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. Fault If the sunroof no longer assumes the desired position automatically, programme sunroof electronics as follows: Electrically operated Sunblinds for rear door windows 3 1. Switch on ignition. rea r window blind 3 To reduce sunlight at the rear seats. Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to Pull the blind upw ards using the grip and 2. Press the rotary switch until the sunroof is rear seats. Operation w ith ignition shut, then keep it pressed for at least a engage it at the top in the door frame. switche d on. further 3 seconds. To raise = Press N 3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it To lower = Press N again depressed until the sunroof is open. Do not operate blind if there are objects 4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it lying in front of the rear w indow. depressed until the sunroof is closed. 5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there until the sunroof is fully raised. 6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sunroof is closed. 50 Seats, interior

Seats, interior

Manually a djustable front sea ts ...... 50 Electrically adjustable front seats 3 .. 52 Head restraints ...... 55 Armrest 3 between the front seats.... 57 Rear seat armrest ...... 57 Travel Assistant 3 ...... 58 Luggage compartment extension ..... 65 Luggage compartment cover 3...... 66 Safety net 3, Esta te...... 67 Lashing eyes ...... 69 Reversible carpet 3 ...... 69 Manually adjustable front seats Adjusting the backrest To adjust, turn side handwheel on the seat FlexO rganizer 3...... 69 9 Warning while releasing the load on the backrest. Notes on loading the vehic le ...... 71 Move backrest to suit seating position. Three-stage safety system...... 72 Never adjust seats during driving, as they Three-point seat belts ...... 72 can move uncontrollably. Belt tensioners...... 73 Important: Do not sit nearer than Using the seat belts...... 76 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering Child restraint systems 3 ...... 77 wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment. Airbag system ...... 80 Cigarette lighter 3 ...... 93 Adjust seat longitudinally Accessory sockets 3 ...... 93 To adjust seat position, pull handle at front Ashtray ...... 94 of seat, move seat and then release Stowage comp artm ents...... 95 ha ndle . Drink holders ...... 97 Sunvisors...... 97 Seats, interior 51

Adjusting the seat height 3 To adjust seat incline 3 Ad justing the lumb ar support 3 To adjust height of seat, operate rear lever Pump action of lever To adjust, activate the lever on the on outboard side of seat. Upwards: Seat steeper backrest, relieving pressure on the backrest Pump action of lever Downwards: Seat flatter as you do so. Upwards: Seat higher Adjust lumbar support to suit personal Downwards: Seat lower requirements. 52 Seats, interior

Electrically adjustable front seats 3 9 Warnin g

Care must be taken when operating the electrically adjustable seats. There is a risk of injury, particularly for children, and a danger that articles could become trapped. Keep a close watch on the seats when adjusting them. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly. To adjust thigh support 3 on the sports Seat position seats 3 Adjust driver’s seat such that with the To adjust, press button in recessed grip driver sitting upright the steering wheel is Adjustment located in the centre beneath the adjusting held in the area of its upper spokes with the The seat position can be adjusted by cushion and move the thigh support. driver’s arms slightly bent. means of switches on the outboard side of the se ats. Adjust thigh support to suit personal Push front passenger’s seat as far back as requirements. possible. Adjusting the inclination Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at The seat backrests must not be tilted too front. far back (recommended maximum tilting angle approx. 25°). 9 Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly before starting-off. Seats, interior 53

Adjusting the longitudinal position Electrically operated lumbar support 3 on Seat position Move switch 1 forwards/backwards. driver’s seat Adjust driver’s seat such that with the Height adjustment Adjust lumbar support using four-way driver sitting upright the steering wheel is Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear switch on outboard side of driver’s seat. held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slightly bent. Seat backrest adjustment Adjust lumbar support to suit personal Turn switch 2 forwards/backwards. re qu ireme n ts. Push front passenger’s seat as far back as possible. Operate switch until desired seat position is Moving support up and down: press button reached. Seat position – see page 52. up or down. The seat backrests must not be tilted too Increasing and decreasing support: press far back (recommended maximum tilting After adjusting the seat, adjust height of angle approx. 25°). seat belt – see page 76. button forwards or backwards. Thi gh s up port 3 on driver’s seat 9 Warnin g See page 52. Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly before starting-off. 54 Seats, interior

Readiness for operation Store and activate the settings using the 3 z With ignition on, remote controls When the vehicle is loc ked using the remote z within 10 minutes of switching ignition control the current driver’s seat and off, exterior mirror positions are stored - z within 10 minutes of opening or closing see page 28. the driver’s door, The seat adjusting procedure can be z within 10 minutes of inserting or stopped immediately by operating a removing the ignition key. setting button. Readiness for operation stops when the Front passenger-side exterior mirror with vehicle is locked. mirror parking assistance 3 See page 43. Storing settings 1. Adjust se at. Overload Memory function 3 for el ect ricall y If the seat setting is electrically overloaded, 2. To adjust exterior mirror - see pages 6, the power supply is automatically cut off adjustable driver’s seat and exterior 43. mirrors for a short time. Three different seat and mirror settings can 3.Press memory button M and the position The sy stem is protected by fuses in the be stored (e.g. for three drivers). button to be used (1, 2 or 3) fusebox – see page 246. simultaneously, and storage is acknowledged by an acoustic signal. Retrieving settings Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the stored sea t and mirror positions have b ee n re ach ed . For reasons of safety, seat adjustment stops immediately if the position button is released or one of the setting buttons is op erate d. Adjustments may only be performed with vehicle stationary. Seats, interior 55

Head restraints To adjust the incline, swivel the bottom Adjusting the rear head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints edge of the head restraint forwards or integrated in the rear seat backrest 3 and the outboard rear seat head backwards. To adjust head restraints, pull forwards restraints 3 with both hands and slide up or down. To adjust height, press button on side and To increase the size of the luggage adjust height. compartment or improve visibility, push In order to increase the size of the luggage head restraint down as far as possible if compartment or if they are not being used, seat is unoccupied. push rear head restraints down as far as If seat is occupied, pull head restraint possible - see page 65. upwards. When the seats a re occupied, ad just the height according to the body size of the occupant. 56 Seats, interior

Head restraint position Active head restraints 3 Removing the head restraints The middle of the head restraint should be In the event of a rear-impact, the active Press and release the two catches. Pull and at eye level. If this is not possible for head restraints tilt slightly forwards. The remove the head restraint. extremely tall persons, set to highest head is more effectively supported by the In order to increase the size of the luggage position, and set to lowest position for head restraint and the danger of whiplash compartment or if they are not being used, small persons. in the neck area is reduced. push rear head restraints down as far as 9 Warning Active head restraints are identified by the possible - see page 65. lettering ACTIVE o n th e h ead re s tra in t Note guid e sleeves. Dis reg arding the instructions can lea d to Only approved objects or components injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle should be attached to the head restraint of passenge rs must b e informed the unoccupied front passenger’s seat. accordingly before setting off. Seats, interior 57

Armrest 3 between the front seats The armrest contains a stowage Rear seat armrest The armrest can be pushed forwards. If the compartment: to open, slide armrest back, The armrest can be folded down. press button at front and lift. armrest is not required, push it back and If the rear centre seat is being used or the fold it up. rear seat backrests are being folded down, fold armrest upwards. 58 Seats, interior

Travel Assistant 3 Installing the Travel Assistant Swivel open and hold cover of front The Travel Assistant contains Swivel out retaining device on seat with attachment points in floor in front of strap. console. z Arm re s t z Stowage compartments Insert the two rear retainers of the z Waste container conne cting cons ole in the retaining de vice z Drink holders on the seat and engage. z Acc essory socke ts. z Connection console e.g. for DVD player 3 z Elec tric cool box z Foldaway tables z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartment. The Travel Assistant is installed on a console above the centre seat in the rear. Seats, interior 59

Swivel connecting console downwards and Swivel the locking lever downwards. To lock, insert Travel Assistant into recesses engage in attachment points. Check the locking position of the Travel in connecting console and slide back as far Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J as possible. on next page) must not be visible. Otherwise, lock using the key – see page 63, Fig. 17575 J. Remove cap 3 from p lug at securing bracket. 60 Seats, interior

If it is correctly locked, the red mark must Drink holder and accessory sockets Stowage compartments no longer be visible in the window, Open the drink holder by pressing the The lower stowage comp artment is opened otherwise the procedure must be repeated. marking. by pressing the ma rk . The und ersid e of the compartment has an opening through 9 Warning Only accessories with maximum power consumption of 120 Watts must be which objects in the compartment can be connected to the accessory sockets. For raised. If it is not correctly locked, the Travel notes – see page 93. The upper stowage compartment is Assistant could be propelled forwards located under the armrest. To open, press with considerab le force when hard the button and fold the armrest upwards. braking occurs, risk of injury. Seats, interior 61

Connecting console for DVD player 3 Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD Electric cool box When not in use, pull connecting console player display into bracket from below and To open, fold open the armrest together upwards, press button and slide fix in position with bracket. with the stowage compartment. downwards. Maximum load: 1 kg. 62 Seats, interior

Switch on the cool box as needed. Foldaway tables Set required clearance by adjusting Fold arm rest upwards (1). longitudinal position of foldaway table (4). Use recessed grip to pull foldaway table S wivel a rm rest down. upwards as far as it will go (1), swivel foldaw ay table forwards (2) and fold downwards (3). Seats, interior 63

To fold away the tab le, swivel the armrest Fold the table upwards past the resistance Dismantling the Travel Assistant up. point (2), swivel it downwards and insert in Open catch using key, red mark appears in Push the table forwards as far as it w ill the Travel Assistant (3). window. go (1). Swivel armrest down. 64 Seats, interior

Pull the Travel Assistant to the front on the Press the locking lever down, press the Swivel the connecting console upwards connecting console and remove. button on the front of the connecting and pull it from the retaining device on the Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket. console and swivel the locking lever seat. up wards. Swivel the retaining device back on the seat. Seats, interior 65

Luggage compartment extension Cover behind armrest can be locked from Folding down the rear seat backrests Fold down the cover behind the armrest luggage compartment 3: turn hand le 90°: Push the rear head restraints right down. Fold down the armrest on to the seat Locked = Handle horizontal Place the belt buckles in storage pockets in cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover Unlocked = Handle vertical the seat cushions. forwards. Slide front seat forwards slightly. The outer seats can continue to be used for Remove Travel Assistant 3 - see page 60. passengers. Unlock one or both rear seat backrests by 9 Warning depressing pushbuttons and fold down on to seat cushion. The load must not obstruct operation of Return front seat to desired position. the pedals, handbrake and gearshift, or the freedom of movement of the driver. Do not leave unsecured objects in the interior. Note instruction on page 71.

Engage the cover behind the centre armrest audibly in position. 66 Seats, interior

Restoring backrest to an upright position Fold ing down the front passenger’s Luggage com partment cover 3 Audibly engage the rear seat backrests. se at 3 5-door Hatch There is a locking indicator on the release Push head restraint on front passenger’s Removing lever. If the rear seat backrests have been seat down as far as it will go. Detach retaining straps from tailgate. correctly locked the red indicator on the Slide front passenger’s seat backw ards. release levers must not be visible. Pull cover from the side guides. Fold front passenger’s seat forwards by Fitting raising release lever. Engage cover in side guides and fold down. To restore, raise the release lever, restore Attach retaining straps to tailgate. the front seat backrest to an upright position and audibly engage. Notes on loading See page 71. Seats, interior 67

Estate Removing Safety net 3, Estate To close Open luggage compartment cover. The safety net can be fitted behind the rear Pull luggage compartment cover towards Raise the release lever on the right of the seats or, with the rear seat backrests folded rear of vehicle using handle and hook into luggage compartment cover. Remove down, behind the front seats. side retainers. cover from the brackets by lifting first on Passengers must not be carried behind the Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged the right, then on the left. safety net. objects on the cover. Fitting Fitting behind the rear seats To open Fit the luggage compartment cover in the Remove the luggage compartment cover - Remove luggage compartment cover from bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the see left column. side brackets. It rolls up automatically. release lever on the right-hand side, fit the luggage compartment cover in the bracket Fit the cassette with rolled safety net into on the right-hand side, engage and press the side brackets and engage by twisting. the release lever closed. 68 Seats, interior

Extend the net from the cassette. The roof Removing Pull each side hook from the cassette and frame houses two installation openings. Fit Remove the luggage compartment cover. attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor. the net rod in the installation opening on Detach the safety net rod from the Extend the net from the cassette. The roof one side and then the other and engage by brackets in the roof frame. frame houses tw o installation openings. Fit pushing forwards. Slide both latches inwards; push the the net rod in the installation opening on Fit the luggage compartment cover. cassette with rolled net backwards in the one sid e and then the other and engag e by bracke t, twis t an d rem ov e u pw ards. pushing forwards. Fitting behind front seats Removing Fold both rear seat backrests. Place the Detach the safety net rod from the rolled net on the floor behind the front brackets in the roof frame. seats in such a way that the cog rail in the Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the slit on the net is to the rear. vehicle floor. Seats, interior 69

Lashing eyes FlexOrganizer 3 The illustrations show some possible uses. In the luggage compartment, secure items Flexible system for dividing the luggage Varia ble partition wa ll being transported against slipping by compartment or securing loads in an See Fig. 17596 J. Press the rods of the attaching lashing straps 3 or a luggage Estate. partition wall together slightly and engage 3 net . The components are housed in a stowage in the desired guide rail openings in the compartment at the rear in the load floor - side walls. The rods can be engaged in 3 Reversible carpet see page 96. various positions. Folding floor covering with two different The system consists of: Varia ble partition net surfaces. When transporting objects in the See Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net luggage compartment, fold reversible z Variable partition net, z together a little and insert into relevant carpet with appropriate surface on top. Variable partition wall, z Partition rod, openings in side wall guide rails. The rods z Mesh pockets for the side walls, can be engaged in various positions. The z Hooks. partition net can be installed horizontally or vertically at different heights. The components can be mounted in the two guide rails in the side walls of the luggage compartment. 70 Seats, interior

Hooks and mesh pockets for the side walls Removing To stow away, pull partition rods, partition See Fig. 17598 J. Engage the hooks in the Press together the rods of the partition net rods and separate telescopic rod apart openings of the guide rails in the side walls wall/net or the telescopic rods and remove in the middle and fold the tw o ha lv es as indicated in the illustration and turn 90°. from the guide rails. Turn the hooks 90° together - see Fig. 17599 J. Roll up partition The mesh pockets can be hung from the and remove. and partition net and place in hooks. FlexOrganizer stowage compartment with other components. The FlexOrganizer components are housed Close lid. in a stowage compartment at the rear in the load floor. To open, raise the handle and open the flap – see page 96, Fig. 17611 J. Seats, interior 71

Notes on loading the vehicle z Obje cts m ust not be store d in the a irb ag z Heavy objects in the luggage inflation area, because they could cause compartment should be placed against injury if the airbag inflates. the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the z The load must not obstruct the operation rear seat backrests are folded down, of the pedals, the handbrake or the against the front seat backrests. If gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of objects are to be stacked, the heavier movement. Do not place loose objects in objects should be placed at the bottom. the interior. Unsecured objects in the luggage z Do not drive with luggage compartment compartment would be thrown forwards with great force in the event of heavy open when transporting bulky objects, for example, since toxic exhaust fumes braking, for example. could penetrate the interior. z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 z Weights, payload and roof load - attached to lashing eyes – see page 69. If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is z Do not allow the load to protrude above see page 293. braked heavily or driven around a bend, the upper edge of the rear seat z Driving with a roof load - the handling of the vehicle may change. backrests, or above the upper edge of see pages 184, 187, 218. A roof load the front seat backrests if the rear seat increases the sensitivity of the vehicle z Saloon / Hatch: loose objects in the backrests are folded down. luggage compartment should be to crosswinds and has a detrimental effect on vehicle handling owing to the secured against slipping using a z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3 luggage net 3 – see page 69. must alway s b e freely a ccessib le. vehicle’s higher centre of gravity. z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when z Do not place any objects in front of the 9 Warnin g transporting objects in the luggage rear window or on the instrument panel. compartment - see page 67. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct Failure to observe these descriptions can the driver’s view and will be thrown z Estate: Close luggage compartment lead to injuries which may be fatal. through the ve hicle , for ins ta nce in the Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed cover - see page 67. event of heavy braking. accordingly. z When transporting objects in the luggage compartment the rear seats must be engaged - see page 65. 72 Seats, interior

Three-stage safety system 9 Warning Com prising: z Three-point seat belts. The airbag systems serve to supplement z Belt tensioners at the front seats. the three-point seat belts and belt te ns ione rs. The s eat b elts must the re fore z Airbag sy ste ms for driver, front alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these passenger and outboard rear seat instructions may lead to injuries or occ upa nts 3 . end ang er life. Vehicle p assengers must The three stages are activated in sequence be informed accordingly. depending on the severity of the accident: Please read the instructions provided with z The automatic seat belt locking devices prevent the belt strap from being pulled the child restraint system. out and thus ensure that the vehicle occupants are retained in their seats. Three-point seat belts z The front seat belts are pulled down at The vehicle is equipped with three-point the belt buckles. This means the belts fit seat belts with automatic retractors and snugly, the occupants are decelerated locking devices, allowing full freedom of early with the vehicle and the body body movement although the spring loading is reduced. tensioned seat belts always ensure a snug z The airbag systems are also triggered in fit. the event of serious accidents and form a For information on correct seating safety cushion for the occupants. position – see pages 52, 77, 82. Depending on the severity of the The seat belts lock during heavy accident, the front airbags inflate in two acceleration or deceleration. stage s. Seats, interior 73

Belt force limiter s 9 Warning on the front seat belts reduce stresses on the body by releasing the seat belt gently Always wear your seat belt, and that during an impact. This allows the body to means also in urban traffic and when you move slightly in anticipation of the impact. are a rear seat passenger. It can save your life. Testing the seat belts Check all parts of the belt system from time Also, pregnant women must always wear to time for damage and to ensure function. a seat belt – see page 76. Replace damaged parts. Following an accident, have the seat belts and actuated In the event of an accident, persons not belt tensioners replaced by a workshop. wearing seat belts endanger their fellow Do not make alterations to the seat belts, occupants and themselves. their anchorages, their automatic Control indicator X for the seat belt – retractors and the belt buckles. Belt tensioners see page 101. Do not damage the seat belt with sharp The front seat belt systems are fitted with Seat belts are only intended for one person. objects, and do not get it trapped. They are not suitable for anyone under belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled 12 years of age or under 150 cm tall. down and tensioned at the belt buckles in the event of frontal and rear collisions, For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e depending on the severity of the accident. recommend the Vauxhall child restraint This tensions the seat belts. system – see page 77. 74 Seats, interior

Actua tion of belt tensioners Actuation of belt tensioners is indicated by 9 Warnin g continuous illumination of control indicator v - see next column. Have the cause of the fault eliminated immediately by a workshop. If the belt tensioners are triggered, they must be replaced by a workshop. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics Important information - see page 73. allows faults to be quickly remedied. If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text AIrbAG appears on the odometer display. Pressing the reset button will cause the text to disappear. It then reappears on the odometer display 10 seconds later. Control indicator v for belt tensioners The operation of the belt tensioners is electronically monitored together with the airbag sy ste ms and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the belt tensioner system or the airbag systems - see page 86. The belt tensioner or the airbag systems may not activate if an accident occurs. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v. Seats, interior 75

Im portant z The belt tensioner and airbag system z We recommend that you have the front z Do not fit accessories not specifically control electronics can be found in the se ats remove d by a w orkshop in the released for your vehicle type or store centre console area. In order to avoid event of actuation of the belt tensioners. objects in the belt tensioner operating malfunctions, do not store magnetic z The belt tensioners trigger once only, area (in the area of the belt buc kles) due objects in this area. indicated by the lighting of the control to the risk of injury in the event the belt z When using the rear seats, make sure indicator v. Have a workshop replace tensioners are triggered. that the components of the front seat triggered belt tensioners. z Do not make any modifications to the belts are not damaged by shoes or other z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety components of the belt tensioners, as objects. Do not allow dirt to enter the instructions given for this must be this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. automatic seat belt retractor. observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling 9 Warning company for disposal.

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigger the belt tensioners with risk of injury. 76 Seats, interior

Height adjustment Using the seat belts 9 Warning Fitting seat belts Height adjustment of upper anchorage point for front seat belts: Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and O n pre gna nt wome n in particular, the lap place it across the body, making sure it is belt must be positioned as low as 1. Pull out the seat belt slightly. not twisted. possible across the pelvis so as not to put 2. Front seat belts: Push the button down or Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The too much pressure on the abdomen. push the belt guide up. front seat backrest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate Rear seat belts: Press the belt guide and Bulky clothing will impede the snug fit of push up or d ow n. properly. The recommended angle of the seat belt. The seat belt must not be inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap placed over hard or break able ob jects in 3. Set desired height. belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly the pockets of your clothing (e.g. pens, 4. Allow belt guide to audibly engage. across the body. Tension the belt keys, spectacles) as this may cause injury. frequently whilst driving by tugging the Do not place any objects, such as Do not adjust height whilst driving. diagonal part of the belt. handbags or mobile telephones, between the seat belt and your body. Seats, interior 77

Child restraint systems 3 When using a child restraint system, follow the instructions for installation and use. The country in which you are trav elling may not permit the use of child restraint systems on certain seats. Always comply with the local or national regulations. Selecting the right system Your child should travel facing backw ards in the vehicle for as long as possible. A child has a very weak cervical spinal column and in the event of an accident is less likely to suffer injury in a rear-facing, semi-lying Adjust height such that the seat belt passes Removing the belt position than if seated upright. over the wearer’s shoulder and rests To remove the seat belt , press the red 9 Warnin g against the shoulder. It must not pass over button on the catch; the seat belt retracts the neck or upper arm. by itself. Never carry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury. 78 Seats, interior

1 Permissible options for fitting a child restraint1) B = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child Weight and On front passenger’s On outboard rear On centre rear seat restraint system with transponders. 2) age class se at seats If the child restraint system is being Group 0: secured using a three-point seat up to 10 kg belt, move seat height adjustment 3 or approx. to uppermost position. Move front 10 months B1, + U, + U passenger’s seat as far back as possible and move front passenger’s Group 0+: seat belt anchorage point to lowest up to 13 kg position. or approx. 2 2years B = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child Group I: restraint system with transponders. 9 to 18 kg If the child restraint system is being 2, + U, + U or approx. B secured using a three-point seat 8 months to belt, move seat height adjustment 3 4years to uppermost position. Move front Group II: passenger’s seat as far back as 15 to 25 kg possible so that vehicle safety belt or approx. runs from anchorage point towards the front. 3to7years X U U Group III: 22 to 36 kg or approx. 6to12 years

1) For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child restraint be installed on one of th e outboard rear seats. 2) We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit. Seats, interior 79

U = Can be used universally in Note Mounting brackets 3 for IS OFIX child combination with a three-point z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm restraint systems se at be lt. tall should only travel in an appropriate The brackets located between the backrest child restraint. and seat cushion are used for mounting + = Vehicle sea t available with ISOFIX ISOFIX child restraint systems. fixings. When using ISOFIX, only z When transporting children, use the child ISOFIX child restraint systems restraint systems suitable for the child’s Please follow the instructions approved for the vehicle may be weight. accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint used. system. z Ensure that the child restraint system has X = No child restraint system permitted been correctly fitted - see instructions O nly ISO F IX child restraint sy ste ms in this weight class. provided with child restraint system. approved for the vehicle may be used. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. z Do not stick anything on the child restraint sy ste ms a nd do not cove r the m with any other materials. z Only allow the child to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing away from the road. z A child restraint system which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. z Secure or remove child restraint systems carried in the vehicle when not in use. 80 Seats, interior

Airbag system Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3 The airbag system consists of several The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in the separate systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion event of a side-on collision and provides a for the driver or front passenger in the safety barrier in the head area on the Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body the risk of injury to the head considerably in the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. the event of a side-on collision. frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head are thereby substantially reduced. Seats, interior 81

Exception: Front passenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags 3 on th e fron t passenger’s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. Seat occupancy recognition - see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see page 78. Examples of events triggering the front airbag system: Airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle: the front airbags are triggered at low Front airbag z the control indicator for Vauxhall child vehicle speed. The front airbag system is identified by the restraint systems y with transponders 3 word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and in th e od om ete r displa y. z Impact against a yielding obstacle: above the glove compartment. (such as another vehicle): the front The front airbag system will be triggered: airbags are only triggered at a higher The front airbag system comprises: z depending on the severity of the vehicle speed. z an airbag with inflator in the steering accident, wheel and a second one behind the trim z depending on the type of impact, panel above the glove compartment, z z control electronics with impact sensors, within the range shown in the illustration, z independent of side airbag and curtain z control indicator for airbag systems v in 3 instrument cluster, airbag system . 82 Seats, interior

When triggered, the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for 9 Warning 9 Warnin g the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat The front airbag system provides The three-point seat belt must be occupants is checked, thereby optimum protection when the seat, correctly fitted – see page 76. substantially reducing the risk of injury to backrest and head restraint are correctly the upper body and head. adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat The front airbag system will not be according to the occupant’s height such No impairment of view will occur, because triggered in the event of: that with the driver sitting upright the z the ignition being switched off, the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly. steering wheel is held in the area of its upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms z minor frontal collisions, s lightly be nt. The front pas se ng er’s s eat z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, should be as far back as possible, w ith z the backrest upright – see pages 3, 52. collisions involving a side or rear-impact, Do not place the head, body, hands or tha t is to say, if it would not be of benefit feet on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. to the occupants. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airbags inflate. Important information - see page 89. Seats, interior 83

9 Warning

Seat belts must therefore always be worn. The front airbag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wea r your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an accident. In the event of an accident the seat belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so that the front airbag system can provide you with effective protection. Side airbag 3 The side airbag system will be triggered: In addition, the front airbag system w ill The side airbag system is identified by the z depending on the severity of the not be triggered for the front passenger’s word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the accident, seat in model variants with seat occupancy front seat backrests. z recognition 3 if: depending on the type of impact, The side airbag system comprises: z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, z within the range shown in the illustration z an airbag with inflator in the back of the on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child driver’s and front passenger’s seat front passenger’s side, restraint system with transponders 3 . respectively, Seat occupancy recognition – see z independently of the front airbag z the control electronics, page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system sy ste m. with tran s po n ders 3 – see page 77. z the side-impact sensors, Exception: z control indicator for airbag systems v in Front passenger’s seat with seat instrument cluster, occupancy recognition system 3. The seat z seat occupancy recognition 3, occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags 3 on th e fron t z the control indicator for Vauxhall child passenger’s side if the front passenger’s restraint systems y with transponders 3 seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child in th e od om ete r displa y. restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. Seat occupancy recognition - see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see page 78. 84 Seats, interior

In addition, the side airbag system will not 9 Warning be triggered for the front passenger’s seat in model variants with seat occupancy There must be no objects in the area in recognition 3 if: which the airbag inflates or in the area z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, between the ba ckrests and the v ehicle z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child body. Do not place the hands or arms on restraint system with transponders 3. the covers of the airbag systems. Important information – see page 89. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 87. The three-point seat belt must always be Vauxhall child restraint system correctly fitted – see page 76. with transponders 3 – see page 77.

The side airbags will not be triggered in the event of: When triggered, the side airbag inflates z the ignition being switched off, within milliseconds to form a safety cushion z frontal collisions, for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, reduces the risk of injury to the upper body z collisions involving a rear-impact, and pelvis in the event of a side-on z collisions involving a side-impact outside collision. the passenger cell. Seats, interior 85

Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered: When the curtain airbag is triggered it The curtain airbag system is identified by z depending on the severity of the inflates within milliseconds and provides a the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. accident, safety barrier in the head area on the The curtain airbag system comprises: z depending on the type of impact, re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame the risk of injury to the head considerably in z within the range shown in the illustration the event of a side-impact. on the driver’s and front passenger’s side on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or re s pective ly, front passenger’s side, z the control elec tronics, z together with the side airbag system, z the side-impact sensors, z irrespective of seat occupancy z the control indicator for airbag recognition, v system s in th e in st r u me nt . z independently of the front airbag system. 86 Seats, interior

9 Warning 9 Warnin g

There m ust be no objects in the area in Have the cause of the fault eliminated which the airbag inflates. Do not place immediately by a workshop. the hands or arms on the covers of the airbag systems. Important information – The system’s integrated self-diagnostics see page 89. allows faults to be quickly remedied. The three-point seat belt must always be If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument correctly fitted – see page 76. cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text AIrbAG appears on the odometer display. The curtain airbags will not be triggered in The text is acknowledged by pressing the the event of: reset button. It then disappears from the z the ignition being switched off, odometer display 10 seconds later. z frontal collisions, Control indicator v for airbag systems The operation of the airbag systems is z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, electronically monitored together with the z collisions involving a rear-impact, seat occupancy recognition systems 3 z collisions involving a side-impact outside and the belt tensioners and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control the passenger cell. indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the airbag systems, the seat occupancy recognition system 3 or the belt tensioners - see page 74. The systems may not activate if an accident occurs. Deployment of the airbags is indicated by continuous illumination of v. Seats, interior 87

Seat occupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system 9 Warnin g deactivates the front and side airbags for the front passenger’s seat if the front Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with passenger’s seat is not occupied or a transponders 3 can be fitted on the front Vauxhall child restraint system with passe ng er’s se at. Use of sy ste ms w ithout transponders 3 is fitted on the front transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag system 3 remains activated. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be identified by a The control indicator for seat occupancy recognition y is located in the odometer sticker. display. If control indicator y illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition; see next Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition page, Fig. S 14742. can also be identified by the sticker on the If a Vauxhall child restraint system with side of the instrument panel - see transponders 3 is fitted, the control illustration above. indicator y illuminates continuously after Vauxhall child restraint systems with the ig nition is switched on as soon as the transponders 3 are automatically system has detected the child restraint detected if correctly fitted to the front system. Only then may the child restraint passenger’s seat. When these child system with transponders 3 be used on the restraint systems are being used on the passenger’s seat. front passenger’s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are deactivated. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Pay attention to control indicator seat y for occupancy recognition 3 - see page 88. 88 Seats, interior

Control indica tor y for Vauxhall child If the control indicator flashes when the restraint systems with transponders 3 child restraint system with transponders 3 The p resence of a Vaux hall child restraint is correctly fitted, there is a fault with risk of system with transponders 3 is indicated injury to the child. Fit the child restraint after the ignition has been switched on by system on the rear seat. Have the cause of continuous illumination of the control the fault eliminated by a workshop. y indicator in th e od om ete r disp la y, as If no Vauxhall child restraint system with soon as the seat occupancy recognition transponders 3 is fitted, the control system has detected the child restraint indicator must not illuminate or flash, as system. the front passenger’s airbag systems would not deploy. Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a workshop. 9 Warnin g If control indicator y does not illuminate whilst driving, the front and side airbags If the Vauxhall child restraint system with for the front p assenge r’s se at are not transponders 3 has been fitted deactivated and there is a risk of fatal according to the instructions, control injury to the child. Fit the child restraint indicator y for Vauxhall child restraint sy ste ms on the rear seat. Have the cause of sy ste ms with transponders must the fault eliminated by a workshop. illuminate in the odometer display when the ignition is switched on. If the child restraint system is not correctly fitted or the transponders are defective, If the control indicator does not illuminate the control indicator flashes. Check that whilst driving, the front passenger’s child restraint system is correctly fitted. For airbag systems are not deactivated and fitting child restraint system with there is a risk of fatal injury. In this case fit transponders 3 - see instructions provided child restraint sy ste ms on the rea r se at. with child restraint system. Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a workshop. Seats, interior 89

Im portant z The airbag systems and belt tensioner z The airbag systems are triggered z Do not fit accessories or place objects in control electronics can be found in the independently of each other based on the expansion zone of the airbag centre console area. In order to avoid the severity of the accident and the type system s - risk of injury if a irb ags are malfunctions, do not store magnetic of impact. The side airbag system 3 and deployed. objects in this area. the curtain airbag system 3 are z Do not place any objects between the z Do not stick anything on the steering triggered together. See seat occupancy airbag systems and the vehicle wheel, instrument panel, front seat recognition on page 87 for exceptions. occupants; risk of injury. backrests or roof frame in the vicinity of z Each airbag deploys once only. Have a the airbags, or on the front passenger’s workshop replace deployed airbags 9 Warning seat cushion, or cover any of those areas immediately. with other materials. z The speeds, directions of movement and Never carry child restraint systems or z Use only a dry cloth or Interior/ deformation properties of the vehicles, other objects on your lap - risk of fatal Upholstery Cleaner to clean the steering and the properties of the obstacle in j u r y. wheel, instrument panel, front seat concerned, determine the severity of the backrests, roof frame and seat cushion accident and triggering of the airbags. z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to of the front passenger’s seat. Do not use The degree of damage to your vehicle hang up light articles of clothing or coat any aggressive cleaning agents. and the resulting repair costs alone are hangers. Do not place any objects in the z Only protective covers which are not indicative that the criteria for pockets of the hanging items – risk of approved for your vehicle with side triggering of the airbags were met. in j u r y. airbag 3 may be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective covers, make sure that the airbag units on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests are not covered. 90 Seats, interior z Do not perform any alterations on the z In vehicles with seat occupancy components of the airbag system, as this recognition 3, do not place any heavy would render the vehicle unroadworthy. objects on the front passenger’s seat otherwise the airbag systems for the 9 Warning front passenger’s seat may be triggered in the event of an accident. The systems can be triggered abruptly z In vehicles with seat occupancy and cause injury if they are handled recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions im pr o per ly. do not use protective covers or extra seat cushions on the front passenger’s seat. z We recom mend hav ing the steering z In order to prevent malfunctions when wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling using a Vauxhall child restraint system parts, the door seals, the handles and with transponders 3 on the front the seats removed by a workshop. passenger’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be Use of child restraint systems 3 on the instructions given for this must be placed under the child restraint system. front passenger’s seat in vehicles with observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling airbag system s, but without sea t company for disposal. 9 Warning occupancy recognition 3 z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should Child restraint systems as well as other on ly tra vel on th e rear se ats. This doe s objects must never be carried on the lap not apply to children who are travelling of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If in child restraint systems with carried in this way, child restraint systems tran s po n ders 3. with transponders 3 in v ehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger’s airbag systems not being triggered in the event of an accident. Seats, interior 91

9 Warning

Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag and no side airbag 3: Child restraints facing the rear of the vehicle must not be fitted to the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury. Child restraints facing the front (child restraints for weight ranges I, II and III – see page 77) are permitted on the front passenger’s seat, providing that it is pushed back as far as possible and the backrest has been adjusted so that the la p be lt f it s s n ug ly . Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag can be recognised by the word AIRBAG above 9 Warnin g the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the sunvisor on the front Vehicles with side airbag 3: No child 3 passenger’s side - see Fig. 17424 T on restraint system may be fitted on the previous page. In some model variants, the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury. warning sticker may be on the side of the instrument panel - see Fig. 17118 T. A vehicle with side airbags can be identified by the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests. Seat occupancy recognition 3 – see page 87. 92 Seats, interior

Use of child restraint systems 3 on front Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition Vauxhall child restraint systems with passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag can be identified by control indicator y in transponders 3 can be identified by systems 3 and with seat occupancy the odometer display. If the control a sticker or badge - see illustration. recognition 3 indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle 9 Warning is equipped with seat occupancy recognition - see page 87. Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition tran s po n ders 3 can be fitted on the front can also be identified by the sticker on passenge r’s se at. Use of sy ste ms without the side of the instrument panel - transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. see Fig. 17625 J. The seat occupancy recognition system detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 and switches off the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 87. Seats, interior 93

Cigarette lighter 3 Accessory soc kets 3 Do not damage the sockets by using The cigarette lighter is in the front centre The soc ket in the centre console and the unsuitable plugs. console. cigarette lighter socket can be used to The maximum power consumption of Press in cigarette lighter with ignition connect electrical accessories. The sockets electrical accessories must not exceed switched on. Switches off automatically are ready for operation when the ignition is 120 watts. switched on. If the engine is not running the when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw Do not connect any current-delivering cigarette lighter. battery will be discharged. More accessory socke ts 3 can be found in the centre accessories, e.g. electrical charging devices or batteries. console beneath the rear air vents 3 and in the Travel Assistant 3. Electrical accessories connected to the socket must comply with the Estates have an additional accessory socke t 3 to the left in the luggage electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, compartment next to the luggage compartment lighting. otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur. Accessory sockets in the Travel Assistant 3 – see page 60. 94 Seats, interior

Ashtray To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray Rear ashtray 3 To be used only for ash and not for insert at the points illustrated and pull The ash tray is in the rear centre console. combustible rubbish. up wards. The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated. 9 Warning To empty, open the ashtray, press the Failure to observe these descriptions can spring (arrow) and pull out the ashtray. lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly.

Front ashtray The ash tray is in the front centre console beneath a cover. The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated. Seats, interior 95

Stowage compartments Centre console stowage compartment 3 Stowage compa rtment in the roof lining 3 Glove compartment Division of the stowage compartment can To open, press the point indicated. To open, pull handle upwards. be changed by moving the partition in the The maximum permitted load on the side guide s. At the front of the opened cover there is a stowage compartment is 0.4 kg. pe n holde r. The stowage compartment must be closed The g lov e com partment should remain whilst driving. closed w hilst driving. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 143. 96 Seats, interior

Stowage compartments in the luggage Estates have an additional stowage When opening, ensure that the hinge at the com partm ent compartment in the load compartment fold is opened and that the entire floor To access press down bar and open the floor. cove ring is not rais e d. cover. To open, pull the release lever and open Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3 the flap. stowage – see page 234. Stowing the spare wheel – see page 236. Jack and vehicle tools stowage – see page 238. Seats, interior 97

Sunvisors Use the sunvisor to protect from glare by pulling it down and swivelling it to the side. During driving, the mirrors 3 in the sunv isors should be cove red.

Drink holders Dr inks holders, rear 3 Drink holders, front 3 The drink holder can be found beneath the The drink holder can be found between centre seat: pressing front edge moves the front seats in the centre console: drink holder out. slide cover 3 open. Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 – see page 60. 98 Instruments, controls

Instruments, controls Control indicators I The control indicators described here are Engine oil pressure not present in all vehicles. The descriptions Control indicator illuminates red. however, apply to all instrument versions. It illuminates when the ignition is switched The control indicator colours mean: on and extinguishes shortly after the z Red Danger, important reminder engine starts. z Yellow Warning, note, fault Illuminates when the engine is running: Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This z Green On confirmation may result in damage to the engine and/or z Blue On confirmation locking of the drive wheels: 1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly O as possible without impeding other Turn sig nal lig hts vehicles. Control indicator flashes green. 2. Depress clutch. Control indicators ...... 98 The control indicator flashes on the Instrument display...... 105 respective side. 3. Shift manual transmission or Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic Information display ...... 108 Both control indicators flash with the transmission 3 , set selector lever to N. Warning buzzers...... 126 hazard warning lights on. 4. Switch off ignition. Wind screen wiper ...... 126 Rapid flashes: A turn signal light or the related fuse has failed, failure of turn signal 9 Warnin g light on the caravan/trailer 3 . Turn signal lights – see page 130. When the engine is off, considerably Change bulbs - see page 252. more force is needed to brake and steer. Fuses - see page 246. Do not remove key until vehicle has come to a standstill, otherwise the steering column lock could engage unexpectedly.

Check oil level before contacting a workshop. Instruments, controls 99

p Alternator Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine starts. Flashes while starting: Battery voltage too low. Have electrical system tested by a workshop. Illuminates when the engine is running: Stop and switch engine off. Battery will not be charged. Engine cooling may be interrupted. Effect of brake servo unit may R For ve hicles with Ea sy tronic 3 , the c ontrol stop in vehicles with diesel engines. Brak e sy stem , clut ch sy stem indicator flashes for a few seconds when Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is Check drive belt condition and tensioning before contacting a workshop for It illuminates when the ignition is switched not applied. assistance. on if the handbrake is applied or if the 9 Warning brake and clutch fluid level is too low. For v further instructions – see pages 209, 276. Illuminate if the handbrake has been Airb ag sy ste m s 3 , belt tensioners 3 released: stop vehicle and interrupt Control indicator illuminates red. journey immediately. Contact a Illuminates when the engine is running: workshop for assistance. Fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioners - see pages 74, 86. 100 Instruments, controls

( Door open Control indicator illuminates red. It illuminates with the doors open.

j Easytronic 3, star ting the engine Control indicator illuminates yellow. It illuminates if the footbrake is not depressed. The indicator extinguishes as soon as the footbrake is depressed. The engine can only be started with the footbrake depressed - see page 169. W 1 Coola nt temperature SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3 t Control indicator illuminates red. Control indicator is illuminated in the Bulb replacement 3 3 Control indicator illuminates red. Illuminates when the engine is running: transmission display if the SPORT mode Stop and turn engine off, coolant is selected. It illuminates if a bulb is defective. Check temperature is too high. Risk of engine Further information - see pages 178, 179. the lights and replace any defective bulbs. damage. For coolant temperature display - Replacing bulbs - see page 252. see page 106. Check coolant level - T see page 275. Winter programme of automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 8 Control indicator illuminates in Exterior lights transmission display with Winter Control indicator illuminates green. programme engaged. It is illuminated when the exterior lighting is Further information – see pages 172, 180. on – see page 128. Instruments, controls 101 s r A Open luggage compartment Parking distance sensors 3 Engine electronics, transmission Control indicator illuminates red. Control indicator illuminates yellow. electronics 3 , diesel fuel filter 3, It illuminates with the luggage Fault in system. Contact a workshop for im mobiliser compartment open, to close luggage he lp. Control indicator illuminates or flashes yellow. compartment – see page 34. Parking distance sensors 3 – see page 202. It illuminates for a few seconds when the > u ignition is switched on. 3 Front fog lig hts Continuous Damping Control 3, SPORT Control indicator illuminates green. Illuminates when the engine is running: mode Fault in engine or gearbox electronic It is illuminated when the front fog lights Control indicator illuminates yellow. system. Electronics have switched on are on – see page 130. Fault in system. Contact a workshop for emergency running programme; fuel he lp. consumption may be increased and the C vehicle’s driveability reduced - Main beam Further information – see page 198. see page 192. Contact a workshop Control indicator illuminates blue. immediately. X 1) It is illuminated when main beam is on and Seat belt 3 Diesel engines Z19DTL, Z19DT, during headlight flash – see pages 7, 128. Control indicator illuminates red. Z 19 DTH: Have water drained from diesel fuel filter - see page 274. r It illuminates once the ignition has been Fog tail light switched on until the seat belt is applied. Flashes when the ignition is on: Control indicator illuminates yellow. A warning buzzer also sounds once the Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; vehicle has started moving. the engine cannot be started - It is illuminated when the fog tail light is on see page 27. – see page 131. Putting on a seat belt – see page 76.

1) Sales designation – see page 284, 285. 102 Instruments, controls

H Coolant level Control indicator illuminates yellow. Illuminates when the engine is running: Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off engine. Check coolant fluid level - see page 275.

u Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control indicator illuminates red. Illuminates whilst driving: Fault in Anti-lock Brake System - ! Flashes: see page 210. Preheating for diesel engines 3, (in vehicles with diesel particle filter) 3 diesel particle filter The driving situation is such that the diesel Control indicator illuminates or flashes particle filter self-cleaning function cannot yellow. operate automatically. You may continue Illuminates: to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle Preheating system active, switches on only will not be damaged and does not require if outside temperature is low. se rvice. The self-cleaning function will automatically operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its normal op erating temperature. The control indicator ! will continue to flash until the self-cleaning operation is complete. This may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher vehicle spe eds. Further information – see page 194. Instruments, controls 103 p y m Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering Seat occupancy recognition 3 Cruise control 3 Control indicator illuminates red. Control indicator illuminates or flashes on Control indicator illuminates green. Fault in electro-hydraulic power assisted the odometer display. It is illuminated when the system is on – steering system. The power assisted Illuminates: see page 200. steering may have failed. The vehicle can Seat occupancy recognition has detected be steered but considerably more force is a child restraint system with transponders. Y required. Contact a workshop for Airbag systems for the front passenger’s Fuel level assistance. seat are deactivated - see page 87. Control indicator illuminates or flashes yellow. Flashes: v Illuminates: Elec tronic Stability Progra mme Fault in the system or child restraints with transponder fitted incorrectly - Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e a rea. (ESP®Plus) 3 Control indicator flashes or lights yellow. see page 87. Flashes: Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately. Flashes whilst driving: S System actively engaged - see page 196. Engine oil level 3 Never let the tank run dry. Illuminates whilst driving: Control indicator illuminates yellow. Erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic System switched off or fault in the The engine oil level is checked converter to overheat - see page 190. Electronic Stability Programme - automatically. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed see page 196. Illuminates when the engine is running: the fue l sy ste m as de sc rib ed on pa ge 228. Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessary - see page 272. 104 Instruments, controls

B Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 Control indicator flashes yellow. Flashing: F ault in sy ste m. C ontac t a workshop for help. Flashing for 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on: System adjusted for driving abroad. AFL - see page 132.

Z w Exhaust gases 3 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 Control indicator illuminates or flashes Control indicator illuminates red: yellow. Tyre pressure difference, check tyre It illuminates when the ignition is switched pressure at next opportunity. on and extinguishes shortly after the Control indicator flashes red: engine starts. Considerable pressure difference or direct Illuminates when the engine is running: loss of pressure, stop immediately and F ault in emission control syste m. The check tyres and tyre pressure. permitted emissions may be exceed ed. Control indicator illuminates yellow: Contact a workshop immediately. Fault in system. Contact a workshop for If it flashes when the engine is running: he lp. Fault that may cause damage to the Tyre pressure monitoring system – catalytic converter – see page 192. Contact see page 204. a w orkshop for assistance immediately. Instruments, controls 105

Odometer Re cords the mile s (k ilome tres) counte d. Display in the ev ent of airbag system malfunction – see page 86. Trip odometer Display of miles (kilometres) covered since reset. To set to zero, hold reset knob down for approx. 2 seconds with ignition switched on.

Instrument display Tachometer In some model variants the pointers of the Indicates engine speed. tachometer, the speedometer, the coolant Warning zone: Maximum permissible temperature gauge and the fuel gauge engine speed ex ceeded; danger to engine. briefly go to the end stop as a functionality check. Speedometer Speed d isplay. 106 Instruments, controls

For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge shows the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adequate. During operation the system is pressurised. The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly to over 100 °C.

Coola nt temperature d isplay Fuel gauge Pointer in zone = Engine operating Pointer in = Reserve area at left temperature not yet left zone or re ach ed Y illuminated Pointer between = Normal operating Pointer in = Refuelling - the zones te mpe ratu re left zone or see page 189 Y flashing Pointer in = Temperature too warning zone at high: Stop. Switch Never let the tank run dry. right or W is off engine. Risk of Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed illuminated engine damage. the fue l sy ste m as de sc rib ed on pa ge 228. Check coolant level Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, - see page 275. the amount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less than the specified tank capacity. Instruments, controls 107

For E asy tronic 3, the display flashe s for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running but the footbrake is not d epre ss ed.

Transmission display 3 InSP Service interval display 3 Display of gear selected for automatic When InSP appears on the odometer transmission 3 or current gear or m od e for display, make an appointment with a Ea sy tronic 3 . workshop for servicing as soon as possible. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised P Automatic transmission park Repairer. position R Reverse gear Service, maintenance – see page 268. N Neutral A Automatic mode on Easytronic M Manual mode on Easytronic D Automatic mode on automatic transmission 1-5 Manual mode, current gear on Easytronic 1-5 Manual mode, selected gear on 1-6 3 automatic 108 Instruments, controls

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 } .5°C BC 1 All values 12:01 17,0°C 11:25 21 BC 2 257.0 miles FM 3 90,6MHz Range Timer 1 REG AS RDS TP mph RDS [ TP] Ø40

7.0 ga l . 8 257miles Ø 31.0 miles/ gal.

Information display Board Information Display 3 Grap hical Information Disp lay 3, Triple Information Display Display of time, outside temperature and Colour Informa tion Display 3 Display of time, outside temperature and date/Infotainment system 3 (when it is on). Display of time, outside temperature, date/ 3 date/Infotainment system 3 (w hen it is on). Display F in the display indicates a fault. Infotainment system (when it is on) and Electronic Climate Control 3. When the ignition is off, the time, date and Have the cause eliminated by a workshop. outside tem perature can be presented for The Graphical Information Display 15 se cond s b y brie fly pressing one of the presents the information in monochrome. two buttons below the display. The Colour Information Display presents the information in colour. Display F in the display indicates a fault. Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop. Instruments, controls 109

The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the v ehicle and the I nfotainment system 3, trip comp uter 3 and Electronic Clim ate Control 3 settings. : Some information appears on the display 8:56 -5,5°C in an abbreviated form. Slippery road For Infotainment system - see Infotainment 07.04.2004 -2,5°C system instructions. For Electronic Climate Control 3 - see page 156. OK Display F in the display indicates a fault. Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop. Outside temperature In vehicles with Graphical Information A fall in temperature is indicated Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3 , immediately and a rise in temperature an icy road surface warning message after a time delay. app ears on the display. No m essag e is displayed if the temperature is less If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the than -5 °C. sy mbol : illuminates in the Triple Information Display or the Board 9 Warnin g Information Display 3 as a warning for icy road surfaces. : remains illuminated until Caution: The road surface may already temperatures reach at least 5 °C. be icy even though the display indicates a few degrees above 0 °C. 110 Instruments, controls

Correcting time 3 Deactivating/activating automatic time Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: Infotainment system off, correct time signal. If the incorrect time is press Ö and ; below the display: °C continually displayed, deactivate Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock 8:56 5,5 3 automatic time synchronisation - see display is now in setting mode, next column, and set the time manually. Press Ö twice (until year flashes). 07.04.2004 The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3seconds until } flashe s in d isplay 3 and text "RDS TIME" appears (years flash during this time), Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 0 = Off Press ;; display shows: Triple Information Display RDS TIME 1 = On Set d ate and time Press Ö three times. Infotainment system off: press Ö and ; below the display as follows: Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds: Day flashes ;:Set day Ö:Month flashes ;:Set month Ö:Year flashes ;:Set year Ö:Hours flash ;:Set hours Ö: Minutes flash ;: Set minutes Ö: Clock is started. Instruments, controls 111

11:25} 21.5°C Range

257miles

Board Information Display 3, To select with four-way button: To selec t using the left adjuster w heel 3 selecting functions Select options via the menus and with the on the steering wheel Functions and settings of some buttons/four-way button on the Scroll upw ards 3 equipment 3 can be accessed via the Infotainme nt sy ste m . Previous menu item. Board Information Display. Scroll downwards This is done using the menus and the Next menu item. buttons/four-way button on the Press Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand Selection of highlighted item, confirmation adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. of commands. The resp ective menu op tions are then System settings - see page 112. shown in the following lines on the display. Trip computer 3 – see page 114. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the display is blocked to other displays. Confirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other. 112 Instruments, controls

The functions are displayed in the following orde r: z Time synchronisation, z Time, setting hours, 11:25} 21.5°C z Time, setting minutes, 11:25} 21.5°C z Date, setting day, z Date, setting month, System z Date, setting year, Clock Sync.On z Ignition logic, z Language selection, z Se tting units of me as ure .

Board Information Display 3, Correcting time 3 System settings Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct time signal. If the incorrect time is Press the Settings button of the continually displayed, deactivate Infotainment system. Menu item Audio or automatic time synchronisation 3 and set System will appear. the time manually - see next page. Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach menu item System . After pressing the right-hand part of the four- way button, the first function of the System menu is shown. Some information appears on the display in an abbreviated form. Instruments, controls 113

The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time synchronisation from the Settings menu. 11:25} 21.5°C 11:25} 21.5°C Make the desired setting. Setting date and time English Unit Europe-SI Select the menu item for time and date setting from the Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The setting is executed upon exit from the menu item. Ig ni tion logic 3 Language selection Setting units of measure Adjustment - see Infotainment system You can select the display language for You can select which units of measure are instructions. some func tions. to be used. Select the menu item for language from the Select the menu item for units of measure Settings menu and make the desired from the Settings menu and make the setting. desired setting. 114 Instruments, controls

Board Information Display 3, Average consumption trip computer 3 Average consumption display. The trip computer provides information on Measurement may be reset to zero at any driving data, which is continually recorded time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip and evaluated electronically. 11:25} 21.5°C computer information". Access trip computer vehicle data by Effective consumption pressing the BC button on the Infotainment Inst. Consumpt. Fuel consumption display. system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the Measurement may be reset to zero at any steering wheel. time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". Some information appears on the display miles/gal. in an abbreviated form. 29.6 Av era ge sp eed Average speed display. Once an audio function has been selected, Measurement may be reset to zero at any the subsequent rows of the trip computer time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip function are displayed. Instantaneous consumption computer information". Display changes depending on speed: The functions are displa yed in the following Stoppages in the journey with the ignition order: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h) off are not included in the calculations. z Instantaneous consumption, Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h) Distance travelled z Average consumption, Distance travelled display. z Effective consumption, Measurement may be reset to zero at any z Av erage speed, time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip z Distance travelled, computer information". z Range, z Stop watch. Instruments, controls 115

Resetting the trip c omputer inform ation The following trip computer information can be reset (reset to zero and measurements/calculations restarted): 11:25} 21.5°C z Average consumption, 11:25} 21.5°C z Effective consumption, z Average speed, Range z Distance travelled. Stop Watch Select the desired trip computer information. h 257miles Reset using the left wheel on the steering 01:22:32 wheel or the right/left button of the four- way button: Range z Press for more than 2 seconds: Stop wa tch Range is calculated from current fuel tank Current value. Operation with the four-way button: content and instantaneous consumption. z Press for more than 4 seconds: z Press right button: Start/Stop. The display shows average values. All values. z Press left button for more than After refuelling, the vehicle updates the 2seconds: Reset. range automatically after a brief delay. Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3 If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven on the steering wheel: with the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning "Range" appears on the display. z Press: Start/Stop. If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven Interruption of power supply with the fuel remaining in the tank, the If the power supply has been interrupted or warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the if the battery voltage has dropped too low, display. the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. Acknowledge the menu item as described on page 111. 116 Instruments, controls

FM [TP] C Din

ᕃ 90.6 MHz

19,5° 19:36

Graphical Information Display 3 To select with four-way button: To selec t using the multi-function knob : or Colour Information Display 3 , Select menu items via menus and with the Turn selecting functions buttons/four-way button of the Highlighting of menu options or Infotainme nt sy ste m. commands, selection of function ranges, The functions and settings of some equipment 3 can be accessed via the Press Graphical Information Display or the Selection of highlighted option, Colour Information Display. confirmation of commands. Functions are selected and executed in the To exit a menu, turn the multi-function menu on the display using the four-way knob left or right to Return or Main and button, the multi-function knob 3 on the select. Infotainment system or the left wheel 3 on the steering wheel. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the display is blocked to other displays. Confirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other. Instruments, controls 117

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 FM [TP] C Din Time, Date 19:36 Language ᕃ 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004 Contrast Day / Night

19,5° 19:36 6 Ign. logic

To select using the left adjuster wheel 3 Function ranges System settings on the steering wheel For each functional area there is a main The settings are accessed via the Setting s Scroll upwards page (Main), which is selected at the menu. Previous menu item. top edge of the display (not with Press the Main button 3 (not found on all Scroll downwards Infotainment system CD 30 without the Infotainment systems) on the Infotainment Next menu item. hands-free mobile phone system): system (call up main display). z Press Audio, Press the Settings button of the z 3 Selection of highlighted item, confirmation Navigation , Infotainment system. No menu may be z 3 of commands. Telephone , selected with Infotainment System CD 30. z Trip computer 3. The Settings menu is displayed. For audio, navigation 3 and telephone functions 3 - see Infotainment system instructions. 118 Instruments, controls

Correcting time 3 For systems with GPS receiver1), time and date are automatically set upon receipt of 7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 does not correspond to local time, time can Time 19:36 Time, Date be manually corrected in 30-minute increments or automatically corrected via Language English 2) 3 Date 10 . 07 . 2004 receipt of an RDS time signal . Units German Some RDS transmitters do not send correct Contrast Español time signals. If the incorrect time is Day / Night Nederlands 6 Synchron. clock automatical. displayed often, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the time 6 Ign. logic Français manually. To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select Setting the date and time 3 menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. Language selection Select menu item Time, Date from the fro m the Time, Da te menu. You can select the display language for Settings menu. some functions. The box in front of Synchron. clock The menu for Time, Date is displayed. automatical. will be ticked; see Select menu item Language from the Select the menu items required: Fig. 17340 T. Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The available languages are displayed.

1) GPS = Glo ba l Pos itioning System, Satellite system for world-wide positioning. 2) RDS = Rad io Data S ys tem. Instruments, controls 119

7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36 X English Time, Date German Language ~ Europe-SI Español Units | Japan 12 Nederlands Contrast | Great Britain Français Day / Night | USA Italiano 6 Ign. logic

Select the desired language. Setting units of measure Ad just ing contra st 3 Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of You can select which units of measure are (Graphical Information Display) the m enu item . to be used. Select menu item Contrast from the Settings menu. In systems with voice output 3, w hen the Select menu item Unitsfrom the language setting of the display is changed Settings menu. The menu for Contr ast is displayed. the system will ask whether the The available units are displayed. Confirm the required setting. announcement language should also be Select the desired unit. changed – see Infotainment system instructions. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. 120 Instruments, controls

Setting displa y mod e 3 The display can be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 dark background. BC 1 All values Select menu item Day / Night from the BC 2 Ra ng e 257 miles Settings menu. 257.0 miles Timer 1 Aver. Cons ump. 31.0 miles/gal. The options are displayed. Ø40mph Tyr es Autom atic: adapted based on vehicle Inst. consumpt. 29.6 miles/gal. 7.0 ga l . lighting. 8 Ø 31.0 miles/ gal. Always day design: black or coloured tex t 19,5° 23° 5 Ec o x 19:36 on light background. Always night design: white or coloured 3 Range text on dark background. Graphical Information Display or Colour Information Display 3, Range is calculated from current fuel tank Selections are indicated by a o in front of trip computer 3 content and instantaneous consumption. the m enu item . The display shows average values. The trip computers provide information on Ig ni tion logic 3 driving data, which is continually recorded After refuelling, the vehicle updates the Adjustment - see Infotainment system and evaluated electronically. range automatically after a brief delay. instructions. The trip computer main page (Main) provides information about range, averag e fuel consumption 3 and instantaneous consumption. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the Infotainment sy ste m 3, select the trip computer menu onthe display or press the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Instruments, controls 121

Distance travelled Distance travelled display. Measurement may be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 computer information". BC 1 All values Average speed BC 2 Range Av erage speed display. 257.0 miles Measurement may be reset to zero at any Timer 1 29miles Ø40mph time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip Tyr es computer information". 7.0 ga l . 8 OK Stoppages in the journey with the ignition Ø 31.0 miles/ gal. off are not included in the calculations. Effective consumption If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven Fuel consumption display. Resetting the tr ip comp uter information with the fuel remaining in the tank, the Measurement may be reset to zero at any The following trip computer information warning "Range" appears on the display. time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip can be reset (restart measurements): computer information". If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven z Distance travelled, with the fuel remaining in the tank, the Average consumption z Average speed, warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the Average consumption display. z Effective consumption, display. At that point "Please refuel!" 3 will Measurement may be reset to zero at any z Average consumption. also be displayed on the trip computer time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information". Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer main page (Main) instead of "Range". menu. Acknowledge the menu item as described on page 116. Instantaneous consumption Display changes depending on speed: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h) Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h) 122 Instruments, controls

Interruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrupted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. All values All values

257.0 m iles 257.0 m iles Ø40mph Ø40mph

7.0 gal. 7.0 gal. Ø 31.0 m iles/gal. Ø 31.0 m iles/gal.

The information from both trip computers To reset all information of a trip computer, can be reset separately, making it possible select menu item All values. to evaluate data over different time If trip computer information has been periods. selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset. Select the desired trip computer The recalculated values are displayed after information. a brief delay. The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and recalculated. Instruments, controls 123

The desired stop watch display can be se lecte d from the Opti ons menu 3: Dr iving Time excl. Stops Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 Ü Board Computer The time the vehicle is in motion is BC 1 recorded. Stationary time is not included. BC 1 BC 2 00:00:00 Dr iving Time incl. Stops BC 2 Timer The time the vehicle is in motion is Timer recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary Tyr es Start with the key in the starter switch is Tyr es Reset included. Options Tr ave l Time Measurement of the time from manual activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation Stop watch via Reset. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Timer from the Board Select menu item Tyres from the Board Com puter menu. Computer menu. The Timer menu is displayed. The current pressure of each tyre is To start, select menu item Start. displayed. To reset, select menu item Reset. Further information – see page 204. 124 Instruments, controls

Check control 3 Examples of warning messages for the Check control monitors several fluid levels, Graphical Information Display 3 and the tyre pressure 3, the remote control Colour Information Display 3 are shown. batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 and the On the Board Information Display, main vehicle lighting systems, including the messages appear in an abbreviated form. cables and fuses. When towing, the Acknowledge warning messages as caravan/trailer lighting system is also described on pages 111, 116. Coolant level monitored. Unacknowledged warning messages can check Once the ignition has been switched on, all be re-displayed later. check control functions are automatically Warning messages: verified. Remote Control OK Warning messages appear on the display. Battery If there are severa l warning messa ges, they check are displayed one after the other. Remote control battery voltage is too low – Brakelig ht switch Some information appears on the display see page 29. check in an abbreviated form. Fault. Brake light not illuminating w hen braking occurs. Have cause of fault remedied by a workshop immediately.

Safeguard check Fault. System fault in Vauxhall alarm system. Have the cause of the fault rectified straight away by a workshop. Instruments, controls 125

If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting In vehicles with tyre pressure control Wa sher system, the respective location of the fault sy ste m 3, if there is major loss of pressure Fluid Lev el is displayed as text, e.g.: in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at check Brakelight fa ult, e.g .: Fluid level in windscreen wash system too check right Attention! low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 279. If brake light is defective, the relevant tail Rear left tyre Rear window wash system and headlight light takes over the brake light function. pressure loss wash system 3 are deactivated if wash (value in bar) fluid level is low. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the pressure. For tyre pressure monitoring Coolant level display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.: sy ste m 3 – see page 204. check Tyre pressure Fluid level in engine cooling system is low. check rear Check coolant level immediately – right see page 274. (v alue in bar) Interruption of power supply Check tyre pressure at next opportunity Stored warning messages appear on the using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure display one after the other. monitoring system 3 – see page 204. Checking tyre pressure – see page 299. 126 Instruments, controls

Warning buzzers Push stalk past resistance point and hold: When starting the engine or whilst the windscreen wiper stages are run driving: through; an acoustic signal sounds at z If seat belt is not fastened 3. position §. z When driving with a door open or the Adjustable timed interval wipe $: luggage compartment ajar. Adjuster wheel right = short intervals Adjuster wheel left = long intervals z Once you have reached a certain speed if the handbrake is applied 3. Press the stalk down from position §: z If a specified maximum speed is Single swipe. exceed ed 3. z In the case of Easytronic 3 if A, M or R is selected while the engine is running and the driver’s door is opened but the footbrake is not depressed. Windscreen wiper To activate, gently push stalk upwards. W hen t he v ehi cle is park ed and the § =Off driver’s door is opened: $ = Adjustable timed interval wipe z When the key is in the starter switch 3 . % =Slow z With parking lights or dipped beam & =Fast switched on. z In the case of Easytronic 3, if the The stalk always moves back to the handbrake is not applied and no gear is starting position. To select next higher or engaged when the engine is off. lower stage: move stalk slightly. Instruments, controls 127

Autom atic w iping with ra in sensor 3: Wi nd sc ree n wa sh sy st em and he adl ight Rear window wiper 3 and rear window To activate, gently push stalk upwards. wash system 3 wash systems 3 § =Off To activate, pull stalk towards steering Push stalk forwards to switch on. wheel. $ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor The rear window w iper swipes in timed The wiper is switched on for several wipe interval mode. The rain sensor detects the amount of operations. A single after-wipe occurs at The tailgate w ip er switches on water on the windscreen and automatically speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h). controls the windscreen wiper. Adjust the automatically when the windscreen wiper 3 sensitivity of the system using the adjuster The headlight wash system is ready for is switched on and reverse gear is wheel: op eration when the headlights are engaged. switche d on. W ash fluid is spraye d onto the Push stalk forwards again to switch off. Adjuster wheel right = High sensitivity headlights once. Then the headlight wash Adjuster wheel left = Low sensitivity sy ste m is disa bled for 2 m inutes. The rear window w ash system will remain on for as long as the stalk is held in the 3 Keep sensor area of rain sensor clean by On vehicles fitted with rain sensor , keep forward position. operating the windscreen wash system. the sensor area clean by operating the wash system regularly. The rear window wash system is deactivated when the fluid level is low. 128 Lighting

Model variants with daytime running Lighting lights 3: Parking lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off. Exterior lights ...... 128 Follow the regulations of the country in Main beam, headlight flash ...... 129 which you are driving w hen using daytime Automatic dipped beam activation 3 129 running lights and front fog lights 3. Turn signal lights ...... 130 The rear lights of the Estate automatically Front fog lights > 3...... 130 switch themselves off after 10 minutes if Fog tail light r ...... 131 the luggage compartment is open and the Reversing lights...... 131 Exterior lights vehicle is stationary. Haza rd warning lights...... 131 Turn light switch: Driving abroad – see page 136. Headlight range adjustment ? ...... 131 7 =Off Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 .. 132 8 = Parking lights Door-to-door lighting 3 ...... 133 Parking lights ...... 134 9 = Dipped or main beam Instrument illumination k, In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and information display illumination ...... 134 number plate lights are also on. Courtesy lig ht ...... 134 Control indica tor 8 – see page 100. Battery discharge p rotection...... 136 Light covers...... 136 If the ignition is switched off with the Headlights w hen driving abroad ...... 136 dipped beam or main beam on, the parking lights illuminate 3. Lighting 129

To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk tow ards ste ering whee l. Ma in beam is engaged for the duration of activation. The blue control ind ic ator C is illuminated when main beam or headlight flash is on.

Main beam, headlight flash Automatic dipped beam To switch from dipped to main beam, press activation 3 stalk forwards. Light switch to AUTO: Dip ped beam To switch to dipped beam, push stalk switches on or off automatically when the forwards again or pull towards steering engine is running based on outside light wheel. conditions. The exterior lights are turned off by removing the ignition key. For reasons of safety, the light switch should always remain in the AUTO position. In poor visibility such as fog, turn the light switch to 9. 130 Lighting

After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its starting position. If the stalk is moved past the resistance point, the turn signal light remains on. When the steering wheel moves back towards the straight-ahead position, the turn signal light is automatically deactivated. Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point and release to activate three flashes from the turn signals when changing lanes or the like. Move the stalk to the resistance point and Turn signal lights hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Front fog lights > 3 To activate, press stalk up or down. Switch the turn signal off manually by The front fog lights can only be switched on moving the stalk slightly. Stalk up = R ight when both the ignition and lights are on. Stalk down = Left On = Press >, > illuminates in instrument cluster Off = Press > again or switch off ignition or light. Lighting 131

Fog tail light r The fog tail light can only be switched on when the ignition is on and dipped beam or parking lights are on or if the light switch is in the AUTO 3 position and dipped beam is active. On = Press >, > illuminates in instrument cluster Off = Press > again or switch off ignition or light. The fog tail light on the vehicle is deactivated when towing a caravan/ trailer. Hazard warning lights Headlight range adjustment ? Rev ersin g lights To activate, press button ¨, to deactivate Manual headlight range adjustment 3 Illuminate when reverse gear is engaged press button ¨ again. With dipped beam switched on, adjust and ignition is switched on. To aid location of the pushbutton, the red headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle surface is illuminated when the ignition is load. Turn wheel against resistance and switched on. When the button is pressed, click it to the required position. its control indicator flashes in time with the Correct adjustment of the headlight range hazard warning lights. reduces dazzle for other road users. The hazard warning lights switch on Automatic level control system 3 - automatically when the airbags are see page 204. triggered, and the central locking unlocks all doors. Switch off hazard warning lights 6 with button ¨ . 132 Lighting

Vehicles without automatic level control system 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All se ats occupied 2 = All seats occupied and luggage compartment load 3 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compartment load Vehicles with automatic level control system 3 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All se ats occupied 1 = All seats occupied and luggage Adaptive Forward Lighting Turn lig hting compartment load (AFL) 3 An additional light illuminates at certain 2 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL steering w heel settings (after approx. 90°), compartment load improves illumination of: turn signal settings and speeds (up to approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h). 3 z Curves (curve lighting), Autom atic headlight ra nge adjustment The light shines approx. 90° to the left or On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the z Intersections and tight turns (turn lighting). right of the vehicle and approx. 30 metres range of the headlights is adjusted to the front. automatically based on vehicle load. Curve lig hting The Xenon light beam pivots based on Motorway lighting steering wheel position and speed (from At higher speeds and continuous straight approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h). ahead travel, the dipped beam automatically raises slightly, thereby The headlights shine at an angle of up increasing headlight range. to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Lighting 133

If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will go out after two minutes. The light is switched off immediately by inserting the key into the ignition or pulling the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s door open.

Control indica tor B Door-to-door lighting 3 F lashing: F ault in sy ste m. The sy ste m is not The dipped beam and the reversing lights ready for operation. illuminate for approx. 30 seconds after the If the curve lighting swivelling device fails, driver has exited the vehicle and closed his the relevant dipped beam is switched off. door. The corresponding fog light is To activate automatically switched on for reasons of 1. Switch off ignition. safety. 2. Re move ignition ke y. Contact a workshop. 3. O pen driv er’s door. Flashing of control indicator B for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the ignition 4.Pull turn signal stalk towards steering reminds you that the headlights have been wheel. adjusted - see " Head lig hts when driving 5. Close driver’s door. abroad" on page 136. 134 Lighting

Parking lights Instrument illumination k, Courtesy light The front parking light and tail light of one information display illumination Front courtesy light side of the vehicle can be activated when Brightness can be adjusted when the Illuminates automatically when the vehicle parking: exterior lights are on: is unlocked with the remote control, when a 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3 . Pre ss to re leas e kn ob k and then turn it door is opened or when the key is removed clockwise or anticlockwise and hold until from the starter switch after the ignition is 2. Ignition off. the desired brightness is obtained. switched off. 3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up Display mode 3 – see page 120. Extinguishes automatically with delay after (right parking light) or down (left parking the doors are closed or immediately when lig ht ) . the ignition is switched on or the doors are An acoustic signal sounds and control locked. indicator O illuminates briefly in the Front courtesy light instrument cluster to indicate activation. Manual operation from inside with doors Remove the ignition key before leaving the closed: vehicle. On = Press button c To switch it off, switch on the ignition or Off = Press button c again move the turn signal stalk in the opposite direction. Lighting 135

Entry lighting 3 After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument and switch illumination as well as the courtesy lights illuminate for a few seconds. Illuminated mirror in the sunvisors 3 The lig hting switches on when the cover is opened. Glove c ompar tment lig hting Glove compartment is illuminated when lid is open and ignition on. Cigarette lighter and ashtray illumination 3 Illuminates when ignition is switched on. Front reading lights 3 Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3 Luggage compartment lighting 3 Left and right reading lights are Ce ntre sw itc h position: The re ar courtesy Illuminates when the luggage individually operable. With ignition on: light illuminates together with the front one compartment/tailgate is opened. when a door is opened. On = Press button a. Autom atica lly reg ulated centre console Off = Press button a again The rear reading lights on the left and right lig hting 3 can be switched on separately. With Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. ignition on: Daylight-dependent, automatically On = Switch position I regulated centre console lighting with Off = Switch position 0 ignition switched on. 136 Lighting

Battery discharge protection Headlights when driving abroad Vehicles with Adaptive Forward Lighting To prevent the battery from becoming The asymmetrical dipped beam increases (AFL) 3 discharged, the courtesy light, reading the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of 1. Open fusebox cover in engine lights, luggage compartment lighting and the lane. compartment - see page 250. glove compartment lighting switch off This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the 2. Inse rt any fuse (max i-fuse) 3 in slot 37. automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is vehicle is driven in countries where traffic Fuse assignment – see page 251. switched off. drives on the opposite side of the road. 3. Close fusebox. Light covers Do as follows to prevent glare: 4. Switch on ignition. The inside of the light covers may become Vehicles with halogen - headlight system Then the AFL control indicator B flashes misted up for a short period during or Xenon headlight system without for 4 seconds whenev er the ignition is unfavourable weather conditions, heavy Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 switched on. rain or after washing the vehicle. The Have the workshop convert the headlights. - see pages 104, 133. misting disappears automatically after a Control indicator B short time, but can be speeded up by switching the lights on. Infotainment system 137

Infotainment system Radio reception 3 Vehicle radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting companies cannot guarantee the same quality of reception as obtained with a domestic radio using an overhead antenna. z Changes in distance from the transmitter, z multi-path reception due to reflection and z shadowing may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss of reception altogether. Remote control on steering Radio reception 3 ...... 137 wheel 3 Infotainment system 3 ...... 137 Infotainment system 3 The functions of the Infotainment system 3 Remote control on steering wheel 3 .. 137 The Infotainment system is operated as and the information display can be Twin Audio 3 ...... 138 described in the operating instructions. operated with the adjuster wheels and AUX input 3 ...... 138 buttons on the steering wheel. Electronic data acquisition at toll Further information – see pages 111, 116 sy ste ms 3...... 138 and the relevant operating instructions. Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3...... 139 138 Infotainment system

Twin Audio 3 AUX inpu t 3 Electronic data acquisition at toll Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants The AUX input is in the stowage systems 3 with the opportunity to listen to a different compartment in the centre console. In vehicles with heat-reflecting 1) audio source than the one selected by the An external audio source such as a windscreen 3 attach chipcard 3 for 3 driver on the Infotainment system . portable CD player can be connected via electronic data recording and fee payment Only an audio source that is not currently the AUX input using a 3.5 mm jack. in black area of windscreen on left or right- hand side behind the interior mirror - active on the Infotainment system can be Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times. controlled using Twin Audio. see arrows in illustration. Attaching the Further information is available in the chipcard outside this area may cause data Two headphone connections are available, Infotainme nt sy ste m ope ra ting recording malfunctions. with separate volume controls. instructions. Further information is available in the Infotainment system operating instructions.

1) Solar Reflect. Infotainment system 139

Mobile telephones and radio A hands-free attachment without an For reasons of safety, we recommend that equipment 3 external antenna in mobile phone you do not use the phone whilst driving. The Vauxhall installation instructions and standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS Even use of a hands-free set can be a the operating guidelines provided by the must only be operated if the maximum distraction whilst driving. Be sure to telephone manufacturer must be observed transmission power of the mobile phone observe any country-specific regulations. when fitting and operating a mobile does not exceed 2 Watts with GSM 900 and telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate 1 Watt in other cases. The operating 9 Warnin g the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directive regulations stipulated by the manufacturer 95/54/EG). of the telephone and the hands-free Mobile phones and radio equipment may attachment must be complied with. cause malfunctions in the vehicle Recommended prerequisites for fault-free electronics if they are op erated in the operation: vehicle without the external antenna z Professionally installed exterior antenna unless the above-mentioned regulations to ob ta in th e max imu m ran ge po ss ible. are complied with. z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt. Mobile phones that do not comply with z Installation of the telephone in a suitable the above-mentioned mobile phone spot (see information on page 89). standard and radio equipment must only be operated using an antenna that is O btain advice on pred eterm ined attached to the exterior of the vehicle. installation locations for the external antenna and equipment holder and w ays of using devices with transmission power of more than 10 Watts. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have brackets and various installation kits available as accessories and w ill install them in accordance with regulations. 140 Climate control

Climate control

Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system 3 ...... 140 Automatic air conditioning system 3 141 Electronic Climate Control 3 ...... 141 Air vents ...... 142 Cooled glove compartment 3 ...... 143 Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors ...... 143 Heated front seats 3 ...... 144 Heating and ventilation system, Vehicles without an air conditioning system Heated rear seats 3 ...... 144 air conditioning system 3 do not have buttons for cooling n, 4 Driver’s seat with climate control 3 ... 144 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are air recirculation or demisting and V Heating and ventila tion system ...... 145 combined into one unit that is designed to defrosting . Air conditioning system 3 ...... 148 provide comfort regardless of the season, Air conditioning system 3 – see page 148. Automatic air conditioning system 3 150 weather or outside temperature. Electronic Climate Control 3 ...... 156 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 ...... 163 cooled and dried. Air intake ...... 166 The heating unit heats the air as required in Air outlet...... 166 all operating modes depending on the Pollen filter ...... 166 position of the temperature rotary knob. Note ...... 166 The air supply can be adjusted to suit Maintenance ...... 167 requirements by means of the fan. Climate control 141

The set values appear on the information display. Electronic Climate Control 3 – see page 156.

Automatic air conditioning Electronic Climate Control 3 system 3 Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle Provides a comfortable interior regardless interior regardless of the conditions of the weather, outside temperature or ou ts ide. season. To ensure a uniform and comfortable When an interior temperature is set with climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the temperature control, the temperature inflowing air, air-flow rate and air and amount of inflowing air are distribution are automatically adapted automatically regulated. A uniform, based on the climate conditions outside comfortable climate in the vehic le is the vehicle and the current temperature of thereby automatically obtained based on the vehicle interior. outside climate conditions. Automatic air conditioning system 3 – see page 150. 142 Climate control

Air vents To close the air vents, turn the adjustment Rear air vents 3 Pleasant ventilation to the head area wheel fully downwards. To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster controlled by the position of the Windscreen defroster nozzles (2) wheel all the way up. tem perature rotary knob. Air distribution rotary knob to l or J: Air Adjust quantity of air by rotating the To increase the air supply, set the fan to a flows onto windscreen and door windows. control wheel. higher speed and set the air distribution Additional air vents The airflow can be directed as desired by rotary knob to M. Additional air vents can be found beneath tilting and swivelling the slats. Centre and side air vents (1) the windscreen and the door windows, and To close the air vents turn the adjustment To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster also in the footwell. wheel fully downwards. wheel up. If the rear seats are unoccupied close the Adjust the direction of airflow by turning rear nozzles to increase the air supply at the horizontal and vertical adjuster wheels. the front. Climate control 143

Heating takes place with the engine running and is switched off automatically after approximately 15 minutes. The heated rear w indow automatically switches on if the diesel particle filter 3 is being cleaned.

Cooled glove compartment 3 Heated rear window, Cooled air is fed into the glove heated exterior mirrors compartment through a nozzle. With the ignition on, the rear window and If glove compartment cooling is not exterior mirror heating is switched on by needed, turn the wheel downwards. pressing button Ü: LED in the button Ü illuminated: Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating turned on. LED in the button Ü extinguished: Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating turned off. 144 Climate control

Heated front seats 3 Heated rear seats 3 Driver’s seat with climate Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air Two buttons at rear of centre console in control 3 vent for the left and right-hand seats. front of the rear seats. Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre Turn relevant wheel to set required heating When the ignition is switched on, the air vents. level. heating of the corresponding seat is Move knurled wheel to required ventilation ß Control indicator above adjustment wheel. activated by pressing the button . or heating setting as per requirements. ß We do not recommend prolonged use of LED in the button on: Seat heating on. Control indicator above adjustment wheel. the highest level for people with sensitive LED in the button ß off: Seat heating off. We do not recommend prolonged use of skin. The outboard rear seats are heated. the highest heating level for people w ith To switch off, set wheel to 0. sensitive skin. Seat heating is operational when the To switch off, set wheel to 0. ignition is on. Function only available with ignition switched on. Climate control 145

Heatin g and ventilation system Te m per ature Airflow Air distribution Setting with the central rotary knob. Setting with the right rotary knob. Setting with the left rotary knob. Red area = Warm Four fan speeds: L To head area via adjustable air Blue area = Cold x Off vents, to footwell 1-4 Selected fan sp eed M To head area via adjustable air The rate of airflow is determined by the vents fan. The fan should therefore also be l To windscreen and front door switched on during a journey. windows J To windscreen, front door windows and footwell K To footwell Open the air vents when the rotary knob is set to L or M. 146 Climate control

Heating The comfort and general well-being of the The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitable ventilation and attained until the engine is warm. heating setting. For rapid warming of the passenger To obtain temperature stratification in the compartment: vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and z Set air distribution rotary knob to desired warm feet" effect, move the rotary air position, preferably position J - distribution rotary knob to K or J , move see page 145. the temperature rotary knob to the central z Turn the temperature rotary knob position and open the centre air vents. clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set the fan to speed 3. z Open air vents. Ventilation Vehicles with Quickheat 3 z For maximum ventilation in head area: : Depending on the outside temperature Set air distribution rotary knob to M, op en all v en ts. and engine temperature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quickly z For ventilation to footwell: Set air by means of supplementary electrical distribution rotary knob to K. heating. z For simultaneous ventilation to the head The auxiliary electric heater switches itself area and the footwell: set air distribution on a utoma tica lly . rotary knob to L. z Set the temperature to the desired se tting. z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as desired. Climate control 147

z Turn the temp erature rotary knob clockwise as far as it w ill go (warm). z Set the fan rotary knob to 3 or 4. z Activate heated rear window Ü. z Open side air vents as required and direct them towards the door windows.

Heating the footwell Window demisting and defrosting z Set air distribution rotary knob to K . 9 Warning z Set the temperature rotary knob to the re d zo n e . Disregard of the instructions could lead z Switch on fan. to misting or icing of the w indows and subsequent accidents due to impaired visibility.

Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: z Move air distribution rotary knob to l. z For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set air distribution rotary knob to J . 148 Climate control

Air conditioning system 3 As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures.

Cooling n Air recirculation system 4 Operation only with engine running and The air recirculation button 4 is used to fa n switch e d off: set the ventilation system in air On = Press n recirculation mode (control indicator in Off = Press n again the button). Control indicator in the button. If fu me s or un ple asa nt od ou rs pe ne trate from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. Climate control 149

The switched -on a ir recirculation sy stem reduces air replacement. The humidity increases and the windows may mist up. The quality of the interior air deteriorates over time, which may cause drowsiness.

Comfort setting Ma xim um cooling z Set cooling n as desired. Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so z Air recirculation system 4 off. that warm air can escape rapidly. z n z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or Cooling on. L. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Set temperature rotary knob as desired. z Turn the temp erature rotary knob z Sw itch on fan at desired speed anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold). z z Open air vents as required. Set fan rotary knob to 4. z Temperature rotary knob in centre of Open all air vents. adjustment range: warmer air will flow into The system will switch automatically to air the footwell and cooler air into the upper recirculation mode. zone, with warmer air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre air vents. 150 Climate control

z Cooling n on, the air conditioning Automatic air conditioning compressor automatically switches itself system 3 off at low outside temperatures (icing). Provides a uniformly comfortable interior z Press button V: The fan w ill regardless of the weather, outside automatically switch to 4, air distribution temperature or season. directed on to the windscreen. To ensure a constant and comfortable z Turn the temperature rotary knob climate in the vehicle, the temperature of clockwise. the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are z Open side air vents as required and changed automatically based on climate direct them towards door windows. conditions outside the vehicle. z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are To switch off, press button V again; the automatically compensated. air conditioning will operate at the settings Window demisting and defrosting selected previously. 9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to m isted or icy windows a nd accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or when outside tem peratures are low: Climate control 151

Autom atic m ode Air distribution Temperat ur e p reset Basic setting for maximum comfort: Setting with the left rotary knob. Setting with the centre rotary knob. z Set fan rotary knob to A. L To head area via adjustable air Set the rotary knob to a value between vents, to footwell z Set air distribution rotary knob to desired 17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are M To head area via adjustable air possible. position – see next column. vents The selected tem perature is mainta ined. z Use rotary knob to set temperature to l To windscreen and front door 22 °C (a higher or lower tem perature can windows For reasons of comfort, temperature can be set as desired). J To windscreen, front door windows only be changed in small increments. z Air conditioning compressor activation – and footwell There is no temperature control for settings see page 152. K To footwell below 17 °C (all the way left) or above z All front air vents open. If desired, the Intermediate settings are possible. 27 °C (all the way right). The air rear air vents also 3. conditioning system works at maximum Open the air vents when the air distribution cooling or heating. Deactivation of the air conditioning rotary knob is set to L or M. compressor can reduce the level of comfort and safety – see page 152. 152 Climate control

When the cooling (air conditioning compressor) is active, the air is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures.

Airflow To activate/deactivate air conditioning Setting with the right rotary knob. compressor (cooling) n 1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting, Operation only with engine running and intermediate settings are possible fa n switch e d off: A Automatic fan speed control On = Press n x Fan off Off = Press n again The fan sp eed regulates the rate of airflow Control indicator in the button. that is needed to maintain the preselected tem perature. Select automatic mode for the highest level of comfort. When the fan is off, the air conditioning compre ssor is also off. Climate control 153

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. In operation without cooling, the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button extinguishes.

Manual air recirculation mode Ventilation The air recirculation system minimises the z For maximum ventilation in head area: entry of outside air and the air in the set air distribution rotary knob to M and passenger compartment is circulated. open all air vents. Press button 4 , control indicator in z For ventilation to footwell: Set air button. distribution rotary knob to K . z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set air distribution rotary knob to L . z Set desired temperature. z Set fan rotary knob to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. 154 Climate control

Heating Vehicles with Quickheat 3: The amount of heat is dependent on the Depending on the outside temperature coolant temperature and is thus not fully and engine temperature, the passenger attained until the engine is warm. compartment can be heated more quickly For rapid warming of the passenger by means of supplementary electrical compartment: heating. z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the The auxiliary electric heater switches itself desired position – see page 145. on a utoma tica lly . z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired The comfort and general well-being of the temperature. We recommend a value of vehicle occupants are to a large extent about 22 °C. dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting. z Set fan rotary knob to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary knob To obtain temperature stratification in the to po sitio n 1 - 4. Intermediate settings vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and Maximum cooling for very hot interior are also possible. warm feet" effect, move the rotary air Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so distribution rotary knob to K or J, m ov e that warm air can escape rapidly. the rotary temperature rotary knob to approx. 22° and open the centre air vents. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Set the temperature rotary knob to the desired temperature. z Set fan rotary knob to A. z Open all air vents. Climate control 155

The automatic air conditioning system z Press button V: In fan rota ry knob provides maximum cooling down to the set position A, the fan automatically value. switches to the highest speed and air is At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the directed to the windscreen. way to the left), the system continually runs z Set temperature to maximum heating, with maximum cooling. When the air i.e. turn the centre rotary knob all the conditioning compressor is running, air way to th e righ t ( 28 °C ) . recirculation is automatically switched on. z Switch on heated rear window Ü. To switch off, press button V again; the automatic air conditioning system w ill operate at the settings selected previously.

Demisting and defrosting the windows 9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accide nts ste mming from impa ire d visibility.

Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: z Cooling n on - the AC compressor deactivates automatically when outside temperatures are low (icing). 156 Climate control

Electronic Climate Control 3 Provides the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. FM [TP] C Din To ensure constant and comfortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the ᕃ 90.6 MHz air distribution are changed automatically according to climatic conditions outside the v ehicle. The air is automatically regulated in accordance with the settings personally selected for the driver’ s a nd front passe nger’s side s. Different settings are stored for each The automatic air recirculation system 3 Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l remote control. Use of a remote control will has an air quality sensor 3 to detect influences, such as direct sunlight, are activate the settings associated with it. harmful ambient gases, in which case it will automatically compensated. Manual settings e.g. operating without switch automatically to air recirculation. Data is shown on the information display. cooling and air distribution can be selected When set to automatic mode, Electronic Setting modifications are briefly shown in using the menu - see page 158. C lim ate C ontrol p rov id es the optima l the information display, superimposed When cooling (air conditioning settings for almost all conditions. If over the currently displayed menu. compressor) is active, air is cooled and necessary, Electronic Climate Control The display can vary according to the type dehumidified. settings can be modified manually. of presentation – see page 108. The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen The Electronic Climate Control is only Electronic Climate Control settings are and spores from the inflowing outside air. operational when the engine is running. stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is Cooling (air conditioning compressor) locked - see "Storing custom vehicle switches off automatically at low outside settings in the vehicle key" - see page 28. temperatures. Climate control 157

The temperature can be set higher or lower Automatic air recirculation system 3 as desired. The ventilation system is set to air Different temperatures can be set for the recirculation mode and interior air is driver’s and front passenger’s sides. recirculated. Switching off the air conditioning The automatic air recirculation system has compressor (Eco app ears on the display) an air quality sensor to detect harmful can have a detrimental effect on comfort gases in the outside air, in which case it will and safety - see page 160. switch automatically to air recirculation. All air vents (except the rear air vents 3 ) At low outside temperatures and with the are controlled automatically in automatic cooling (air conditioning compressor) mode. The front air vents should therefore switched off, automatic air recirculation always be open. operation w ill be disabled. This prevents the wind ow s from misting up. Switch manually to air recirculation as necessary. Autom atic m ode Basic setting for maximum comfort: Activating/deactivating automatic air recirculation system – see page 161. z Pre ss AUTO button. Manual air recirculation mode – z Open all front air vents. If desired, the see page 162. rear air vents also 3. z Air conditioning compressor activation – see page 160. z Individually set temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s side to 22 °C using the outer knobs. 158 Climate control

Temperature preset FM [TP] C Din Climate Using the outer knobs, temperatures can Air distribut. be individually set to values between 16 °C AC and 28 °C. ᕃ 90.6 MHz Autom. blower For reasons of comfort, temperature can Auto. recirc only be changed in small increments. Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 : Depending on the outside temperature and engine temperature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quickly by means of supplementary electrical heating. The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on automatically. Common temperature setting Manual settings If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Press the knob for the driver’s side. The Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or Lo appears on the display: the Electronic temperature for both the driver’s and front misted windows), the functions of the Climate Control system runs constantly at passenger’s side can be set together using Electronic Climate Control can be modified maximum cooling power. The temperature the knob on the driver’s side. manually. is not regulated. Individual temperature settings Electronic Climate Control system settings If a temperature above 28 °C is set, Press the knob for the front passenger’s can be changed via the centre knob, the Hi appears on the display: the Electronic side. Temperatures can be set buttons and the menus shown on the Climate Control runs constantly at independently of each other using the display. maximum heating power. The temperature knobs on the driver’s and front passenger’s Press the centre knob to call up the menu. is not regulated. side s. The menu for manual Electronic Climate Temperature settings are stored when the The temperature on both the driver’s and Control system settings appears on the ignition is switched off. front passenger’ s side are shown in the display. display. For reasons of comfort, the temperatures cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C. Climate control 159

The airflow can be increased or decreased Air distribut. FM [TP] C Din by turning the central knob. To return to automatic mode: press ᕃ 90.6 MHz button V or AUTO. Heated rear w indow - see page 143. Auxiliary heating 3 - see page 163.

The individual menu items are highlighted Window demisting and defrosting by rota tin g th e ce ntre kn o b an d s e le cted by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by 9 Warning pressing the knob will open a submenu. Failure to follow the instructions could To ex it a m enu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Main and select. lead to misted or icy windows and accide nts ste mming from impa ire d Manual settings are stored when the visibility. ignition is switched off. Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: Press button V, control indicator in button. Temperature and air distribution settings are made automatically, the fan runs at a high speed (fan speed is indicated on the display) and the windows are quickly cleared of moisture and ice. 160 Climate control

Climate Inflowing air is neither cooled nor Air distribut. Air distribut. dehumidified. This restricts the level of comfort provided by the Electronic Climate AC Air conditioning Autom. blower on / off Control system . This may cause the Auto. recirc wind ow s to m ist up, for exa mple. To activate cooling: Select menu item AC from the manual settings menu and press to activate cooling.

Activating and d eac tiva ting air Air distribution conditioning compressor Select menu item Air distribut. from the If no cooling or dehumidification is manual settings menu. required, switch the air conditioning Make the desired settings in the Air compre ssor off (max im um e ne rgy sav ing s): distribut. menu: Highlight menu item AC from the manual settings menu and select by pressing the Up Air distribution towards knob. Ecoappears on the display. windscreen and front door windows Middle Air distribution to vehicle occupants via adjustable air vents a t front Down Air distribution towards footwell Return to automatic air distribution: deactivate relevant setting or press button AUTO. Climate control 161

FM [TP] C Din Automatic blower Climate Air distribut. Strong AC Automatic ᕃ 90.6 MHz Normal Autom. blower recirculation Weak Auto. recirc air control at bad outside air

Airflow Fan c ontrol in autom atic mode 3 Switching automatic air recirculation 3 on Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or Fan regulation in automatic mode can be or off anticlockwise (if no menu for manual modified. The automatic air recirculation system has settings is displayed). The selected fan Select menu item Automatic blower fro m an air quality sensor to detect harmful x level is indicated by and numbers in the the manual settings menu and select the gases in the outside air, in which case it will display. desired fan control. switch automatically to air recirculation. At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air Depending on the setting, the maximum Select menu item Auto. r ecirc from the conditioning compressor) are switched off. airflow, and thereby the noise level, will manual settings menu and switch it on or To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO increase. off by pressing. button. Switch to manual air recirculation as necessary. 162 Climate control

The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of time. If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also Residual air conditioning on automatically switches on. Observe notes on page 163. To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO button.

Manual air recirculation mode Air conditioning with the engine not The air recirculation system minimises the running entry of outside air and the air in the When the vehicle is stopped and the passenger compartment is circulated. ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still Press button 4 , control indicator in in the system can be used to condition the button. passenger compartment, for example when stopped at a level crossing. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the Pre ss AUTO button with the ignition off. passenger compartment air deteriorates Residual air conditioning on will appear which may cause the vehicle occupants to briefly in the display. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling, the air humidity increases, so the windows may mis t up. C ons eq ue ntly , m anual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button extinguishes. Climate control 163

The air is directed to the windscreen and the front door windows if the V button is pressed before switching the ignition off. Climate Parking heater Warning Air distribut. 9 Start 1 AC Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling Start 2 Autom. blower stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or Start 3 injury. Auto. recirc On Parking heater Setting

Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 Direct a ctivation If the engine is switched off, the interior is For immediate activation with the ignition heated or ventilated depending on the on, select menu item Parking heater and values that have been set and the interior then m enu item On from the manual tem perature. settings menu. The regulation is in accordance with the When the system is activated, the control most recent temp erature settings in the indicator in the AUTO button will Electronic Climate Control system – illuminate. see page 158. When the system is switched The system switches itself off automatically on, the temperature setting can be varied after a maximum of 60 minutes, depending using the outer rotary knobs. on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. For early deactivation, press the AUTO button or select menu item Parking heater and then menu item On once again. 164 Climate control

Parking heater Parking heater Setti ng Start 1 Start 1 Start 1 Start 2 Start 2 Start 2 Start 3 Start 3 Start 3 On On

Setting Setting

Sw itching on a t a pr ogramm ed tim e To set a time, select menu item Setting. Select the required time for programmed Three programmed times can be stored for Then select menu item Sta rt 1, Sta rt 2 switching on. switching on. or Start 3 and set the desired time. When the system is activated, the control For safety reasons only one programmed indicator in the AUTO button will time for switching on can be active at any illuminate. one time. After the heating cycle has been The system switches itself off automatically completed, the next required time for after a maximum of 60 minutes depending switching on must be activated afresh. on the values that have been set and the To store a programmed time for activation, interior temperature. select menu item Parking heater from the To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO manual settings menu. button. After menu item Parking heater the To perform settings, the Parking heater current status will be shown. menu can be called up within 2 hours of switching the ignition off by pressing on the central rotary knob. Climate control 165

The remote control has a range of approx. 600 m. The range can be reduced by obstructions between the sender and receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the battery. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. The auxiliary heating can be switched off at any time by pressing the button §. Deactivating an activated switch-on time: 1.Press button §. Remote control Changing the remote control battery 2. Delay of at least 3 seconds. The sy ste m c an also be switched on and off Replace the battery immediately if the directly using the remote control: 3.Press button § again. range of the remote control starts to become reduced. On = Press button b, the control If required, up to three additional remote indicator in the remote control units c an be prog ramme d. W e Insert a pointed object into the opening in control will illuminate. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall the und erside of the remote control and flip Off = Press button §, the control Authorised Repairer. open the cover. Replace batteries indicator in the remote observing installation position. For battery control will illuminate type – see page 307. Whilst the control indicator is illuminated, Always exchange all batteries at the same no further signal can be sent. time. When the system is activated, the control Make sure that you dispose of old batteries indicator in the AUTO button will in accordance with environmental illuminate. protection regulations. 166 Climate control

Air outlet Note Do not cover the air outlets when storing If the windsc reen is misted due to damp items in the luggage compartment storage weather, temporarily set the system as compartments. described under "Window demisting and defrosting" - see pages 147, 150, 159. Pollen filter The cooling system 3 operates most The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen effectively with the windows and sunroof 3 and spores from the air entering from closed. If the p assenger compartment has outside. The active carbon layer 3 heated up considerably after a long period eliminates most odours and harmful in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows ambie nt g ase s from the air. and sunroof 3 so th at th e h o t air can Have the pollen filter replaced by a escape quickly. workshop at the replacement intervals specified in the Service Booklet. Air intake The air intakes in front of the windscreen on the far right and left sides of the engine compartment must be kept clear to allow air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow. Climate control 167

When cooling 3 (air conditioning In order to improve heating power and Maintenance compressor) is switched on, condensation ensure that the engine operating In order to ensure consistently good forms, which is expelled from the underside temperature is reached quickly, auxiliary operation, the air conditioning of the v ehicle. heating 3 also switches on automatically compressor 3 must be switched on for At least one air vent must be open while when driving if the outside temperature is several minutes once per month cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is less than approx. 8 °C. This occurs irrespective of the weather or time of year. on in order to prevent the evaporator from irrespective of stored auxiliary heating If the vehicle has an Electronic Climate icing up due to lack of air movement. switch-on times. Auxiliary heating switches Control system, this is done automatically itself off automatically when the engine is during travel. Operation with cooling (air Cooling switches off automatically at low switched off, while the combustion air fan conditioning compressor) is not possible outside temperatures. continues running for approx. 2 minutes when outside temperatures are low. Every When the auxiliary heating/auxiliary (humming noise). 6 months, the auxiliary heating 3 should be ventilation 3 is switched on, the Vauxhall operated for a few minutes at a preset alarm system monitoring of the vehicle temperature above 22 °C. 3 interior is deactivated. On faults, contact a workshop. Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (approx. 0.3 litres per heating process on average). When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched on, there may briefly be some smoke and noise. The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself on at outside temperatures of less than approx. 20 °C and at coolant temperatures of less than approx. 80 °C. 168 Driv in g and op era tio n

Driving and operation Easytronic 3 The automatic Easytronic transmission permits manual (Manual mode) or automatic gearshifting (Automa tic m ode), both with automatic clutch control. 9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Ea sy tronic 3 ...... 168 Automatic transmission 3 ...... 176 Driving hints ...... 184 Saving fuel, protecting the environment ...... 186 Transmission display Fuels, refuelling ...... 188 Shows the mode or current gear. Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases.... 190 Drive Control System s ...... 196 Brake system ...... 208 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)...... 210 Wheels, tyres ...... 211 Roof racks 3 ...... 218 Towing eq uipm ent 3 ...... 219 Towing eq uipm ent with removable coupling ball bar 3 , Saloon / Hatch 3 ...... 219 Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 ...... 222 Ca ra van/trailer tow ing ...... 223 Driving and operation 169

It is not necessary to select the neutral position before starting. If no gear is engaged, the transmission automatically shifts into neutral position (N) before starting the engine. This can lead to a slight delay w hen starting.

Starting the engine Easytronic op era tion via the selector lever Depress footbrake when starting the Always move the selector lever in the engine. The engine can only be started appropriate direction as far as it w ill go. with the footbrake depressed. "N" appears Upon release, it automatically returns to on the transmission display. If the the centre position. Pay heed to the footbrake is not depressed the control gear/mode indicator in the transmission indicator j illuminates in the instrument display. cluster, and "N" flashes in the transmission Move selector lever toward s N display - the engine cannot be started. Neutral. Also the vehicle cannot be started if all brake lights have failed. 170 Driv in g and op era tio n

It is also possible to start-off without depressing the footbrake if the accelerator pedal is operated directly after moving the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed starting procedure. In Automatic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespective of driving conditions. Move sel ect or lever towa rds A Switch between Automatic and Manual Sta rting-off mode. Move selector lever toward s + or - Depress the footbrake, release the + Shift to a higher gear Manual gearshifting is possible in Manual handbrake, move the selector lever to A, - Shift to a lower gear + or -. Easytronic is in Automatic mode and mode. The currently engaged gear first gear is engaged (second gear if the appears on the display. If a higher gear is selected when the Winter programme is active). "A" appears If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic running speed is too low, or a lower gear on the transmission display. will automatically shift to a lower gear even when the speed is too high, no shift is effected. This prevents the engine from The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the in Manual mode. This prevents the engine running at too low or too high revs. footbrake is released. fro m stallin g. Gears can be skipped by moving the selector lever repeatedly at short intervals. Driving and operation 171

If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, on It is also possible to start-off in reverse Electronically controlled driving movement of the selector lever to + or - without depressing the footbrake if the programmes Easytronic shifts to Manual mode and accelerator pedal is operated directly after z By means of delayed gear changing changes up or down. The transmission moving the selector lever. If there is no (higher engine speeds) following a cold display shows the currently selected gear. immediate acceleration or the footbrake is start, the operating temperature Move selector lever tow ards R not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R" programme in Automatic mode quickly Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is flashes. After a few seconds, the display and automatically brings the catalytic stationary. reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed converter to the temperature required starting procedure. for optimum pollutant reduction. Depress the footbrake, release the z handbrake and move the selector lever to Adaptive programmes automatically R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears on adapt gearshifting in Automatic mode the transmission display. to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the has a high payload, or is being driven on footbrake is released. inclines. z Winter programme: Press button T – see next page. 172 Driv in g and op era tio n

If the v ehicle is switched to Manua l mode while the Winter programme is active, the Winter programme is interrupted. The Winter programme resumes upon return to Automatic mode.

Winter programme T Kickdown In the event of difficulties starting-off on Depress accelerator past resistance point: slippery roads, press button T ("A" and T transmission shifts to a lower gear appear in the transmission display). depending on engine speed. Full engine Easytronic switches to Automatic mode power is available for acceleration. and the vehicle sets off in second gear. During kickdown no manual gearshifting is The Winter p rogram me is switched off by: possible. z Pressing button T again. z Turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Easytronic the Winter programme automatically switches itself off at extremely high clutch tem peratures. Driving and operation 173

When the engine speed a pproaches its "Rocking" t he vehic le upper limit, the transmission shifts to a If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle higher gear during kickdown even in to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, Manual mode. move the selector lever between R and A (o r + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying Without kickdown this automatic shift is light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not effected in Manual mode. not race the engine and avoid sudden Engine braking acceleration. Automatic mode: This applies only to the exceptional When driving downhill, Easytronic does not circumstances mentioned above. shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine speed has been reached. When braking, Easytronic shifts down in good time.

Manual mode: Manoeuvring the vehicle To utilise the engine braking effect, select a To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth lower gear in good time w hen driving during attempts to park or in garage downhill. entrances the creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the footbrake. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. To prevent damage, Easytronic disengag es the " creep function" a t extremely high automatic clutch temperatures. 174 Driv in g and op era tio n

Stopping the vehicle Vehicle storag e In Automatic or Manual mode, when the Before leaving the vehicle: vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter z Apply handbrake, mode engaged, second gear) is engaged z Remove ignition key. automatically and the clutch released. In R The most recently engaged gear (indicator reverse remains engaged. in transmission display) remains engaged. When the engine is running, a gear is With N , no gear is engaged. engaged and the footbrake is not When the ignition is switched off the depressed, a warning buzzer sounds when Easytronic no longer responds to the d riv er’s door is opened and the gea r movement of the selector lever. shown in the transmission display flashes at a rapid rate. If the handbrake is not Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery applied, the vehicle creeps. Move the may become discharged if the vehicle is selector lever to N and apply the parked for long periods. handbrake. If the handbrake has not been applied, the Fault When stopping on gradients, apply the control indicator R flashes for a few Control indicator A illuminates in the handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To seconds after the ignition is switched off. event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In the event of serious faults, "F" also appears prevent overheating of the clutch, do not With the engine off and the handbrake not on the transmission display. increase engine speed to ensure smooth applied, when the driver’s door is opened a idling when in gear. warning buzzer sounds and the control It is possible to continue driving if only In order to prevent damage to the indicator R flashes; switch on ignition, control indicator A illuminates. M anual Easytronic the clutch is automatically engage gear, switch off ignition and apply mode can then no longer be selected. engaged at extremely high clutch ha ndb ra ke. If "F" also appears on the transmission tem peratures. display, continued driving is not possible. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated crossings. into the system allows rapid fault identification. Driving and operation 175

If the cause of the power failure is not a 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be discharged battery, contact a workshop. If in full contact w ith the housing. the vehicle must be removed from flowing Towing the vehicle and starting the engine traffic, release the clutch as follows: is not permitted when the clutch has been 1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition. released in this way, although the vehicle 2. Opening and propping up the bonnet - can be moved a short distance. see page 228. Contact a workshop immediately. 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see Fig. 17925 J) so that no d irt c an get into the opening when the cap is removed. 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by lifting upwards – see illustration. Interruption of power supply 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 – battery is discharged and a gear has been see page 238) until clear resistance can selected. The vehicle cannot move. be felt. The clutch has now been If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using disengaged. jump leads – see page 230. Do not turn beyond the resistance, since this can damage the Easytronic. 176 Driv in g and op era tio n

Automatic transmission 3 9 Warning The automatic transmission allows automatic shifting (Autom atic mode) or Disregard of these instructions may lead manual shifting (Manual mode) to take place. to injuries or endanger life. The engine can only be started with the Selecting D puts the transmission in selector lever in P or N. When starting in N, Automatic mode. depress the footbrake or apply the handbrake. After the engine has started, If the selector lever is moved to the left from depress the footbrake before engaging a the D position, Manual mode is activated. gear. Do not accelerate while selecting a Gear changes can then be made manually gear. Once a gear is engaged and the by moving the selector lever towards + or -. footb rake is released, the vehicle "creeps". Never depress the footbrake and the accelerator pedal simultaneously. The Transmission display selected gear is shown in the transmission Display of selector lever setting, gear and display - see end column. mode. P Pa rk pos ition R Reverse gear N Neutral D Automatic mode 1-6 Manual mode showing the gear se lecte d Driving and operation 177

The selector lever can only be moved out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the footbrake depressed (selector lever lock). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activated after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary. In positions P or N, the control indicator j illuminates red in the selector lever indicator, the selector lever is blocked - see Fig. S 12547. To engage P or R , press button on se lector lever.

Selector lever settings P, R, N and D The engine can only be started with lever in (Automatic mode) position P orN . When position N is selected, P Park position, front wheels blocked. depress footbrake or apply handbrake Only select with vehicle stationary before starting. and handbrake applied. "P" appears Do not accelerate during the selection on the transmission display. procedure. R Reverse gear. Only select when If the transmission fluid temperature is less vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be the transmission display. moved until the fluid temperature reaches N Neutral or idling position. "N" -25 °C with the engine running (P or N appears on the transmission display. flashes in the transmission display for as long as the selector lever is locked). D Drive position for normal driving in 1st to highest gear. "D" appears on the transm ission display . 178 Driv in g and op era tio n

If the engine speed is too slow, the Electronically controlled driving transmission automatically shifts to a lower programmes gear, but not if the gear was selected z With adaptive programmes, shifting into below a certain speed. other gears is handled automatically If a higher gear is selected below a certain based on the driving style, e.g.: speed a downshift does not take place. – Economical driving style: at slower When engine speed is high, there is no engine speeds. automatic shift to a higher gear. – Adaptation to special driving For reasons of safety, kickdown also conditions still takes place, such as: functions in Manual mode – see page 180. driving up and down hills, towing a caravan/trailer, and with a heavy The selected gear is shown in the load. transmission display – see page 176.

ActiveSelect (Manual m ode) Shift the selector lever from D first to the left and then forwards or backwards. + Shift to a higher gear - Shift to a lower gear If a higher gear is selected at too low a speed or a lower gear selected at too high a speed, there is no change. This avoids revs that are too low or too high. Driving and operation 179 z Automatic neutral shift function z After a cold start, the operating automatically sets the transmission to N temperature programme ensures that to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at the correct gear (increased engine traffic lights. speed) is selected to quickly bring the The automatic neutral shift function is catalytic converter to the temperature activated when the following occurs required for optimum pollutant simultaneously: reduction. – The selector lever is in Automatic or Manual mode. – The footbrake is depressed. – The vehicle is stationary. – The accelerator pedal is not actuated. z If the Continuous Damping Control is set – The transmission fluid temperature to SPORT mode 3, the shift times are is above 0 °C. reduced and gear changes occur at hig her engine sp eeds (not when cruise As soon as the footbrake is released and control is active). The control indicator 1 the accelerator pedal is depressed, the also illuminates in the transmission vehicle starts off in the usual manner. display - see page 176. Continuous Damping Control, SPORT mode 3 - see page 198. z Winter programme: Press button T. Control indicator T appears on the transmission display - see next page and page 176. 180 Driv in g and op era tio n

To deactivate The Winter programme is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z switching off the ignition, z switching to Manual mode. To protect against damage, the starting- off aid automatically cuts out at very high transmission fluid temperatures.

Winter programme T Kickdown Press button T if you are having problems Depress accelerator past resistance point: starting-off on a slippery road surface. transmission shifts to a lower gear To activate depending on engine speed. Full engine The Winter programme can be switched in power is available for acceleration. Automatic mode (T illuminates in the For safety reasons, kickdown is available in transmission display - see page 176). The both Automatic mode and M anual mode. vehicle shifts to 4th gear. Driving and operation 181

Engine braking "Rocking" t he vehic le The automatic transmission automatically If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle selects the driving programme w ith to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, optimal engine braking effect. move the selector lever from D to R in a As needed, lower gears can also be repeat pattern w hile simultaneously selected in Manual mode to increase applying light pressure to the accelerator engine braking effect. 1st gear has the pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid greatest braking effect. sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circumstances mentioned above.

Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the footbrake. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. 182 Driv in g and op era tio n

Stopping the vehicle The ignition key can only be removed when The selector lever can be left in the chosen the selector lever is in position P. gear with the engine running. If the selector lever is not in the P position When stopping on gradients apply when the ig nition is sw itched off, control handbrake or depress brake pedal. To indicator j in the selector lever indicator prevent overheating of the transmission, strip flashes – see page 177, Fig. S 12547. do not increase engine revolutions to Shift the selector lever to P. ensure smooth idling while standing if a If the ignition key is not removed, the gear has been selected. battery may be discharged if the vehicle is Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy then left to stand for a lengthy period of period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level time. crossings. Before leaving the vehicle, apply handbrake, then place selector lever in Fault position P and remove ignition key. In the event of a fault in the automatic transmission, control indicator A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Driving can be continued. In Manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest gear can be engaged. For some faults, only the highest gear is available. Only the highest gear is available in D in Automatic mode. Driving and operation 183

Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronics – see page 192. For diesel engines 1) Z19DTL, Z19DT, Z 19 DTH illumination of control indicator A could also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be drained of water - see page 274. Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a workshop.

Interruption of power supply 4. Press the yellow catch downwards with a If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector screwdriver and move the selector lever lever cannot be moved out of position P out of P. or N. 5. Refit ashtray socket in centre console If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using and latch into position. jump leads – see page 230. 6. Refit ashtray. If the cause is not a discharged battery, Selecting P or N again effects locking unlock selector lever: again. Have the cause of the interruption 1. Apply handbrake. of power supply rectified by a workshop. 2. Remove the ashtray – see page 94. 3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.

1) Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285. 184 Driv in g and op era tio n

Driving hints Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering Sw itching off the engine The first 600 miles (1000 km) If the power-assisted steering fails when When you switch off, fans in the engine Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do being towed with the engine switched off, compartment may continue running for a not use full throttle. Never allow the engine the vehicle can still be steered, but time to cool the engine. to labour at low revs. considerably more force is required. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. Make good use of all gears. Depress the Driving in mountainous terrain or with a after driving in mountainous terrain: allow accelerator pedal a maximum of around caravan/trailer the engine to idle for approximately two three quarters of the available pedal travel The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its minutes in order to prevent heat in all gears. cooling power is therefore independent of accumulation. the engine speed. Do not drive faster than three quarters of Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 maximum speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is After running at high engine speeds or high generated at high engine speeds and less engine loads, operate the engine briefly Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the at slower speeds, do not shift down when at a low load or run in neutral for approx. first 125 miles (200 km). climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping 30 se conds before switching off in order Never coast with engine not running with the gradient in the higher gear. to protect the turbocharger. Many units will not function in this situation Diesel engines: On rising gradients of 10% Sa ve energy – m ore miles / kilom etres (e. g. brak e serv o unit, elec tro-hydraulic or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph Please observe the running-in hints on the power steering). Driving in this manner is a (30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50km/h) previous page and the tips for energy danger to yourself and others. in 2n d g ear; with auto ma tic saving on the following pages. 3 Brake servo unit transmission , do not exceed 25 mph Good, technically correct and economical When the engine is not running, the brake (4 0 km/ h ) in po sitio n 1. driving ensures maximum durability and servo unit is no longer effective once the Dr iving with a roof load performance for your vehicle. footbrake has been depressed once or Do not exceed the permissible roof load – twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but see pages 218, 293. For reasons of safety, significantly greater force is required for distribute the load evenly and secure it braking. properly w ith retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check and retighten the straps frequently. Observe country-specific regulations. Driving and operation 185

Overrun Correct gear selection Cooling fan The fuel supply is automatically shut off Transmission in neutral and without The cooling fan is controlled via a during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is revving in the lower gears. Stop-and-go thermoswitch and therefore only runs if being driven down long gradients or when traffic and driving at a speed too high for necessary. braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to the selected gear or transmission ratio The cooling fan automatically switches on take effect, do not accelerate during increases wear and fuel consumption. when the diesel particle filter 3 is being overrun and, if in manual transmission Change down cleaned depending on the engine. mode, do not depress clutch pedal. To When decreasing speed, shift down into Pedals prevent damage to the catalytic converter, the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch overrun cut-off is temporarily deactivated Do not place any objects in the footwell with a high-revving engine. This is which could slip under the pedals and when the catalytic converter temperature especially important when hill climbing. is high. inhibit the pedal travel. Clutch operation 3 To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, Vehicles with turbocharged engine Always depress the clutch pedal hard to Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if there must be no mats in the area of the the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and pedals. the accelerator is released quickly on transmission damage. account of airflow in the turbocharger. Battery care When driving do not use the pedal as a Engine speed When driving slowly or when the vehicle is footrest; this will cause substantial clutch stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop- Drive in a low engine speed range for each wear. gear as much as possible. and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical loads where Warming up possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated Allow the engine to warm up whilst driving. seats 3 ). Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling speed. Do not apply full throttle until the Depress clutch pedal when starting in order engine has reached operating to relieve the strain on the starter and the tem perature. battery. After a cold start, the automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm. This allows the catalytic converter to quickly reach the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. 186 Driv in g and op era tio n

Saving fuel, protecting the End-of-life vehicle recovery Warming up environment For detailed information on Vauxhall’s z Full throttle and w arming up at idle Trend-setting technology on-going commitment to achieving an speed increase wear, fuel consumption, In the development and manufacture of environmentally susta inab le future, ex haust em ission, the am ount of your vehicle, environment-friendly and in including; design for recycling, take back of pollutant in the exhaust and the amount the main recyclable materials were used. End-of-Life Vehicle’s (ELVs) and the of noise. The production methods used to make recycling of ELVs, view z Drive off as soon as possible after your vehicle are likewise environmentally- www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details. starting. compatible. Energy and environment-conscious Uniform speed Recycling of production wastes keeps the driving z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel z circulation of material closed. Reduction of High noise levels and exhaust emissions consumption, the exhaust emissions, the energy and water requirements also helps are often a result of driving w ithout due proportion of pollutant in the exhaust to conserve natural resources. attention to saving energy and gas and the noise level. protecting the environment. A highly advanced design means that your z Do not accelerate and brake z vehicle can be easily disassembled at the You should therefore drive with energy in unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed, end of its working life, and the individual mind "more miles / kilometres – less fuel". watching the road. materials separated for subsequent re-use. Reduce the noise level and exhaust Avoid frequent starting-off and stopping Materials such as asbestos and cadmium emissions by adopting an environment- e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance are not used . The refrigerant in the air conscious driving style. This is extremely traffic and in queues of traffic by means conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. worthwhile and improves the quality of of clever planning. Select roads with life. New painting techniques employ water as good traffic flow. a solvent. Fuel consumption depends to a great Idling extent on your own personal driving z The engine also consumes fuel when style. The following hints are intended to idling. help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels – z If you have to wait for more than one see page 287. minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Five minutes of idling Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles every time you refuel. This facilitates (1 km) of driving. early detection of any irregularities causing increased fuel consumption. Driving and operation 187

Overrun z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal Repair and maintenance z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustment and during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel being driven down long gradients or Drive at no more than around three consumption. Do not carry out work on when braking – see page 185. quarters of maximum speed and you will the engine yourself. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe into action and save fuel, do not great deal of time. environmental law s b y not disposing of accelerate or depress clutch pedal Tyre pressure materials properly. during overrun. z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to Appropriate parts might not be recycled. Correct gear selection higher road resistance, costs money in Contact with some of the materials z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel two ways: for more fuel and increased involved may pose a health hazard. consumption. tyre wear. z We recommend that repair and z z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your high engine speeds. Electri cal loa ds Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Making use of the tachometer helps to The power consumption of electrical Extr em e d riving conditions save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed equipment increases fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving range for each gear as much as possible z Sw itch off all auxiliary electrical loads on poor roads and winter driving all with uniform engine speeds. Drive as (e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear increase fuel consumption. often as possible in top gear, select the window) when not needed. next higher gear as soon as possible, Fuel consumption increases dramatically and only change down when the engine Roof rack s, sk i-holde rs in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter is no longer running perfectly smoothly. z Due to air resistance, a roof load temperatures, especially on short trips can increase fuel consumption by when the engine operating tempera ture High speed approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km). is not reached. z The higher the speed, the higher the consumption and the noise level. At top z Remove them if they are not being used. z Follow the hints given above to keep speed, you consume a great deal of fuel consumption to a minimum under such and produce excessive noise and conditions. exhaust emissions. 188 Driv in g and op era tio n

Fuels, refuelling Fuel with too low an octane number can Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME Fuel consumption cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held according to DIN EN 590 must not be Fuel consumption is determined under liable for resulting damage. confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not specific driving conditions – see page 287. Petrol with a higher octane number can to be used in Vauxhall engines. Special equipment increases the weight of always be used. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are the v ehicle. As a result, they can increase The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted temperature-dependent. fuel consumption and reduce the specified in vehicles with the Z 22 YH1) engine or the Diesel fuels with improved low temperature maximum speed. Vectra VXR. properties are therefore available on the For the first few thousand miles / The ignition timing adjusts automatically market during the winter months. Make kilometres, friction between the engine and to the grade of fuel used (octane sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel transmission components is higher. This numb er) – see pa ges 284, 285. before the start of the cold weather increases fuel consumption. season. Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 Fuel for petrol engines will ensure economical driving. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with Normal commercial high-quality fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed by a maximum ethanol content of 5% in Fuel with 95 RON w ill result in less power the manufacturer and when using diesel and torque with the Vectra VXR. accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable fuel filters that are heated depending on (for catalytic converter see page 190, for Fuel for diesel engines the outside temperature. octane numbers - see pages 284, 285). The Diesel engines must be operated only on Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels quality thereof has considerable effect on commerc ia lly available diesel fuel meeting that are intended for petrol engines. the performance, running and service life the specifications of DIN EN 590. of the engine. The additives mixed with the Fuel filler cap Since January 2004, some oil companies When replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure fuel are extremely important. For this have mixed their diesel fuel with up to 5% rea son you must only refuel with high- to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) model to ensure full functionality. Diesel- quality fuels containing additives. like RM E (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in engined vehicles have special fuel filler Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% accordance with the current DIN EN 590 caps. do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must and does not harm the fuel/injection not be used unless the vehicle has been sy ste m. The characteristic s of a diesel fue l specifically developed and approved for mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not these fuels. differ from conv entional d iesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability.

1) Sales designation – see page 284, 285 . Driving and operation 189

9 Warning

Fuel is flammable and explosive. When handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity, avoid naked flames or sparks. Do not smoke. This also applies where the presenc e of fuel is revea led b y its characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in the vehicle, have a workshop eliminate the fault immediately.

Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle. The tank flap is locked together with the Refuelling doors – see page 30. Correct filling depends to a large extent on Open the tank flap. proper operation of the fuel dispensing 9 Warning pump: Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it Care must b e tak en whe n ha ndling fue l. suspend from the tank flap. on. The fuel tank has a limiting system which Before refuelling, turn off engine and also 2. After an automatic shut-off, the nominal shut off external heaters with combustion prevents overfilling of the tank. capacity of the fuel tank is reached by chambers (identified by stickers on tank means of two metered top-ups. Insert flap). Switch off mobile phones. fuel dispensing p um p as fa r as it w ill g o. To close, position the fuel filler cap and The tank display updates more quickly if rotate past the resistance until the cap the ignition is switched off during audibly clicks over the retainer. refuelling. Close fuel tank flap. Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately. 190 Driv in g and op era tio n

Damage to the catalytic converter or the z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic vehicle may result if the following points converter, this may result in overheating are not observed: and irreparable damage to the catalytic z On ignition faults, uneven running after converter. cold start, a clear drop-off in engine You should therefore avoid power or other unusual operating unnecessarily long use of the starter symptoms which could indicate a fault in when starting-off, running the tank dry the ignition system, contact a workshop (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to immediately. Continue driving if overheating) and starting the engine by necessary for a short time at low speed pushing or towing. and low revs. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Pl us 3) comes Catalytic converter, exhaust into action are the result of operating gases conditions and are therefore of no Ca talytic conver ter for petrol engines significance – see page 196. Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec tronic system, rendering them inoperative. Use of high-quality fuels other than those specified on page 188 (e.g. LRP1) ) could damage the catalytic converter.

1) LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol. Driving and operation 191 z If the control indicator Z for exhaust Cata lytic converter for d iesel engines gases flashes, slow down until the Damage to the catalytic converter or the flashing stops and the control indicator vehicle may result if the following points illuminates. Contact a workshop for are not observed: assistance immediately. Control z On uneven running, a clear drop-off in Z in dica to r for exhaust gases – engine power or other unusual operating see page 192. symptoms, contact a workshop immediately. Continue driving if necessary for a short time at low speed and low revs. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Pl us 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no Controlling exhaust em ission significance – see page 196. Some of the damaging substances in the exhaust such as carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous oxides (NOx) are reduced to a minim um by making s tructural changes – mainly in the injection system and the ignition system in conjunction with the catalytic converter. 192 Driv in g and op era tio n

Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault which could lead to catalytic converter damage. You may continue driving without damage if you back off until flas hing stops and the control indicator illuminates. Contact a workshop immediately.

Control indicator Z for exhaust Control indicator A for engine elec tronics Illuminates when the ignition is switched on Illuminates for a few seconds after the and during the start attempt. Extinguishes ignition is switched on. shortly after the engine starts running. If it illuminates when the engine is running, Illuminated with the engine running there is a fault in engine or transmission indicates a fault in the exhaust gas electronics. The electronic system switches cleaning system . The permitted emissions to an emergency running programme. Fuel may be ex ceeded . Contact a workshop consumption may be increased and the immediately. driveability of the vehicle may be impaired. Driving and operation 193

In some c ases, faults can be eliminated by If A illuminates, this may also mean water Exhaust gases switching off the engine and restarting. If in the diesel fuel filter in the engines1) the control indicator illuminates again Z19DTL, Z19DT and Z19DTH. Where 9 Warnin g when the engine is running, contact a necessary, have the fuel filter insp ected by workshop to eliminate the ca use of the a workshop for any residual water. Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, w hich is colourless and fault. If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it there is a fault in the immobiliser system. odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. is of no significance. The engine cannot be started. If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle See page 27. interior, open a window and contact a workshop. Avoid driving with an open luggage compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases could penetrate the interior.

During the first drive sm ok e m ay develop because of wax and oil evaporating on the exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the open for a while after the first drive and avoid inhaling the fumes.

1) Sales designation – see page 284, 285 . 194 Driv in g and op era tio n

Diesel p artic le filter 3 The self-cleaning function will The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes automatically operate whilst driving after polluting soot particles out of the engine the engine has reached its normal exhaust gases. The system includes a self- operating temperature. The control cleaning function that operates indicator ! will continue to flash until the automatically whilst driving. The filter is self-cleaning operation is complete. This cleaned by burning the trapped soot ma y take up to 20 minutes of driving. The particles at a high temperature. There may time will be shorter at higher v ehicle be an increase in fuel consumption, speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan more than a few minutes, then the self- operation 3 during the self-cleaning cleaning function will not operate. operation. Operation will continue when driving re sume s.

The self-cleaning function cannot operate automatically during certain driving situations where the engine does not reach its normal operating temperature. An example of this would be driving only short distances in cold weather. If the filter needs cleaning and recent driving situations did not allow the function to automatically op erate, then the control indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle will not be damaged and does not require se rvice. Driving and operation 195

Maintenance Have all maintenance work carried out at the intervals specified. We recommend that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who has proper equipment and trained personnel available. Electronic testing systems permit rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This way you can be certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection and ignition systems operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will have a long service life. We recommend that you do not turn the The control indicator ! extinguishes as ignition off until the self-cleaning operation soon as the self-cleaning operation is You are thereby making an important is complete. If you must turn the ignition off complete. contribution towards keeping the air clean before the operation is complete, then the and compliance with emissions legislation. operation will automatically resume when Checking and adjustment of the fuel- driving the next time and after the engine injection and ignition systems is part of the has reached its normal operating scope of inspection. For this reason you tem perature. should have all maintenance work carried out at the intervals specified in your Service Booklet. 196 Driv in g and op era tio n

Drive Control Systems Electronic Stab ility Program me ESP®Pl us is ready for operation as soon as Pl us 3 (E SP® ) 3 the ignition is switched on and control Interac tive Driving System (IDS+) Plus The IDS + combines the sensors and control ESP® improves driving stability when indicator v ex ting uis hes . units of the Electronic Stability Programme necessary in any driving situation Control indicator v flashes when ESP®Plus (ESP®Plus), the Anti-lock Brake System regardless of the type of road surface or is in action. (ABS) and Continuous Damping Control tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels (CDC). This provides both excellent driving from spinning. The vehicle is now in a critical situation; ESP®Pl us allows you to keep control of the dynamics and greater safety. The system monitors vehicle movements. vehicle and reminds you to match your As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve speed to the road conditions. (understeers/oversteers) engine output is reduced (the sound of the engine changes) 9 Warnin g and individual wheels are specifically braked. This considerably improves the Do not let this special safety feature driving stability of the vehicle on snow and tempt you into taking risks when driving. ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsible driving style. Driving and operation 197

Illuminates whilst driving: The system is switched off or a fault has occurred. The vehicle can continue to be driven. However, driving stability may worsen depending on the nature of the road surface. Switch on ESP®Plus again, or have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied.

Control indicator v Switching off 3 Illuminates for a few seconds when the ESP®Pl us can be deactivated by pressing ignition is switched on. The system is now button v 3. ready for operation. Deactivation is only possible up to a speed Flashing during driving: of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is indicated by This shows the system has come into illumination of control indicator v in the action. The engine output may be reduced instrument cluster. (the sound of the engine changes) and the Pressing the v button again or turning on vehicle may be braked automatically to a Plus small degree. the ignition switches ESP® on again. 198 Driv in g and op era tio n

Continuous Damping Control 3 (CDC) SPORT mode Normal mode When driving in SPORT mode, the CDC automatically adapts vehicle damping, steering 3 (n o t fo r en gin e s damping to the current driving situation Z28NEL/NET)1), throttle application and - and road conditions. for automatic transmissions 3 - the shifting The system continually monitors wheel and points are changed. vehicle movements and immediately Damping and steering 3 become more modifies the damping of each shock direct and provide better contact with the absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally road surface. The engine reacts more adapted to the driving situation and road quickly to accelerator movements. conditions. With automatic transmission 3 the shift Continuous Damping Control is always in times are reduced and gear changes occur normal mode with the ignition is switched at higher engine speeds (not when cruise on. If desired, the system can be switched control 3 is active). to SPORT mode. Activating SPORT mode Press the SPORT button. The LED in the In SPORT mode, the damping control is button illuminates. adapted to a sportier driving style, among other things. This adaptation results in a In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 "harder" suspension setting. the control indicator 1 also illuminates in the transmission display. If the Winter programme 3 has been switched on (vehicles with automatic transmission 3) SPORT mode cannot be activated. Winter programm e - see p age 180.

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. Driving and operation 199

Deactivating SPORT mode The system’s integrated self-diagnostics Briefly press the SPORT button again. The allows faults to be quickly remedied. LED in the button extinguishes. The Continuous Damping Control system resumes Normal mode. SPORT mode is switched off by switching off the ignition or switching off the Winter programme 3 (vehicles with automatic transmission 3). Winter programme - see page 180.

Control indica tor u for Continuous Damping Control or SPORT mode fault Illum inate s for a few se cond s a fte r the ignition is switched on. If the control indicator does not go out, or if it illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the Continuous Damping Control system or SPORT mode. The system is not ready for operation. Have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. 200 Driv in g and op era tio n

Cruise control 3 With automatic transmission 3, only use Cruise control can store and maintain cruise control in D or in Automatic mode speeds of approx. 20 to 125 mph with Easytronic 3. (30 to 200 km/h). Deviation from the saved When the cruise control is active, reaction speed is possible on uphill or downhill times may be increased due to the different inclines. position of the feet. For safety reasons the cruise control cannot be activated until the footbrake 9 Warning has been depressed once. Even with cruise control activated, the Cruise control is operated with buttons m, g, and § on the turn driver has full responsibility for maintaining an appropriate speed. signal stalk. Disregard of these instructions could lead Do not use the cruise control if it is not to injury or danger to life. advisable to maintain a constant speed Control indicator m (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to Illuminates for a few seconds when the yourself and other road users, in heavy ignition is switched on. The system is now traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy ready for operation. roads). When driving, control indicator m will illuminate as soon as the system is switched on. Driving and operation 201

Decelerate To deactivate With cruise control active, hold down Briefly press button §: C ruis e control is button g or briefly press it repeatedly: switched off, control indicator m speed is reduced continuously or in steps extinguishes and the vehicle slowly of 1.2 mph (2 km/h). decelerates. To continue driving, depress When button g is released the current the accelerator pedal in the usual manner. speed is stored and maintained. For reasons of safety, cruise control deactivates under certain driving conditions. For example: z if the vehicle’s speed drops below approx. 20 mph (30 km/h), or z if the brake pedal is depressed, or To activate z if the clutch pedal is depressed, or Briefly press button m: the c urrent speed is z if the selector lever of automatic stored and maintained. The accelerator 3 3 pedal can be released. transmission or Eas ytron ic is in N. Resuming the stored speed Vehicle speed can be increased by g depressing the accelerator pedal. When Briefly press button at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected the accelerator pedal is released, the previously stored speed is resumed. before the cruise control was switched off is resumed. Increa se W ith cruis e control activ e, hold down The stored speed value is deleted when the ignition is switched on. button m or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and maintained. 202 Driv in g and op era tio n

Parking distance sensors 3 The sy ste m re giste rs distance b y me ans of To activate The parking distance se nsors mak e reve rse four sensors in each of the front and rear With the ignition switched on, the front and parking easier by measuring the distance bumpers. rear parking distance sensors are between the vehicle and an obstacle, and automatically activated when reverse gear giving an acoustic signal in the passenger is engag ed. compartment. The parking distance sensors can also be activated at speeds of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) b y pressing the r button on the instrument panel. An illuminated LED and an acoustic signal indicate that it is ready for operation. Driving and operation 203

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3, the front or rear, a series of signals is caravan/trailer towing audible in the vehicle interior. The interval The system automatically detects if a be twee n the signals become s shorter a s towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle. the distance is reduced. If the distance is When towing, inserting the caravan/trailer less than 30 cm, the signal will be plug in the socket automatically switches continuous. off the parking distance sensors for the 9 Warning rear. Fitting rear load racks 3 Under certain circumstances, various Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted reflective surfaces on objects or clothing near the sensors could disrupt the system. as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles. For this reason, care must be taken when reversing even if the parking Control indica tor r Illuminates: distance sensors are operational. This is of particular importance when in the Fault in system. The system is not op erational. Have cause of fault remed ied vicinity of pedestrians. by a workshop. The system’s integrated self diagnostics allows faults to be quickly To deactivate re me died. To deactivate the system, press button r again, the LED in the button w ill go dark. Flashes: The fault is due to sensors obstructed with The system switches itself off automatically snow or ice . The se nsors must be when the forwards speed exceeds approx. undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice. 15 mph (25 km/h). Interference due to external sources of ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the system will operate normally. 204 Driv in g and op era tio n

The vehicle is automatically raised at the Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 rear, increasing the spring travel and The tyre pressure monitoring system ground clearance. continuously monitors the pressure of all The automatic level control system is four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km), A pressure sensor is integrated in each depending on the vehicle loading and the wheel. O nce each m inute, the pressure of nature of the road surface. each tyre is sent to a control unit for Headlight range adjustment – comparison. if the system detects one or see page 131. more pressure differences, control indicator w illuminates or flashes red. In Do not use full load in the event of faults. vehicles with check control 3, the ex act Have the cause of the fault rectified pressure of the tyre in question appears on straight away by a workshop. the information display. In vehicles with Graphical Information Autom atic level control 3 Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3 Automatic level control makes it possible to and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures keep the height of the vehicle constant can be shown in the information display. when subjected to different loads in the rear (e.g. when towing a caravan/trailer). For the system to be operational, all wheels This significantly improves driving must be equipped with pressure sensors conditions. and all tyres must be inflated to the prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring system automatically detects if the vehicle is being driven with a load of up to 3 persons or a full load. Driving and operation 205

Once the ignition is switched on, the system is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. Ü Board Computer 9 Warning BC 1 BC 2 The tyre pressure monitoring system does Timer not replace manual checks with a Tyr es suitable gauge. Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 days and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare 3. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Control indicator w in red as warning Tyre pressure – see pages 213, 299. Select menu item Tyres from the Board message Comp uter menu. Illumination in red whilst driving indicates The current pressure of each tyre is deviating tyre pressure. displayed. Indicator illuminates red: Minor tyre pressure difference; slow down. Check tyre pressure at next opportunity with a suitable gauge and correct if necessary. Indicator flashes red: Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure. Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238. 206 Driv in g and op era tio n

Warning messages in the Graphical Information Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3 In the model variant with check control 3 Navi active Navi active differing tyre pressures whilst driving are indicated by messages on the information display. The message appears in Tyre pressure Attention! abbreviated form depending on the model Check rear Fron t left tyre variant. left tyre pressure loss (value in bar) (value in bar) For exa mple, the following messages c an be displayed: OK OK

A graphic 3 in dica tin g th e lef t re ar tyre is A diagram 3 appears at the same time, shown together with the current tyre marking the front left tyre and showing the pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce current tyre pressure: Considerable speed. Check pressure at next opportunity pressure difference or direct loss of with appropriate gauge and correct if pressure. Exit flow of traffic as soon necessary. as possible without obstructing other On the Colour Information Display this vehicles, stop and check tyre and tyre report will appear in yellow. pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238. On the Colour Information Display this report will appear in red. Acknowledgem ent of warnings – see page 116. Driving and operation 207

General information When m anually chec king tyre pressure with The tyre pressure monitoring system is not a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto ready for operation if the emergency/spare the valve. Tyre pressure – see p age 213. wheel is used and is not fitted with a Every time a tyre is changed, the valve w pressure se nsor; the control indica tor inserts and tyre pressure monitoring illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure system sealing rings must be replaced monitoring system remains operational for by a workshop. the other three wheels. The use of commercially available liquid If you use a complete set of wheels which filled run-flat systems or repair kits can are not fitted with sensors for the tyre impair the function of the system. pressure monitoring system, e. g. four Vauxhall-approved systems can be used. winter tyres or aftermarket tyres of a different size, no fault message will be Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, displayed. The tyre pressure monitoring walkie-talkies) operated in the area could Control indicator w in yellow as fault sy ste m is not ready for operation. cause interference in the ty re pressure monitoring sy ste m. message Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring If control indicator w illuminates yellow system can be retro-fitted by a workshop whilst driving, there is a fault in the tyre up on re ques t. pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel without a pressure sensor (e.g. the spare wheel 3) w ill also generate a fault in the system. Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. 208 Driv in g and op era tio n

Brake system Footbrake The effectiveness of the brakes is an The footbrake comprises two independent important factor for traffic safety. brake circuits. To improve effectiveness, do not brake If one brake circuit faults, the vehicle can unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles still be braked with the other brake circuit. (200 km) after new brake pads have been However the braking effect will occur at a fitted. lower pedal position and considerably more force is required. The braking Brake pad wear must not exceed a distance is longer. Contact a workshop specified limit. Regular maintenance as before continuing to drive. detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore of the utmost importance for traffic safety. To ensure that full pedal travel – can be utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one Have worn brake pads replaced by a of the brake circuits, there must be no mats workshop. in the pedal area - see page 185. Brake assist Pads that have been tested and approved When the engine is not running, the guarantee optimum brake performance. If the brake pedal is slammed on, the vehicle is automatically braked w ith assistance of the brake servo unit maximum brake force amplification in disappears once the brake pedal has been order to achieve the shortest possible depressed once or twice. Braking effect is braking distance w hen full-on braking not reduced, but braking requires occurs (braking assist). significantly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind w hen towing. Maintain steady pressure on the brake pedal for as long as full-on braking is to continue. When the brake pedal is released, the maximum brake force amplification is taken away. Adaptive brake light During full-on braking, all three brake lights flash for the duration of ABS control. Driving and operation 209

Check the brake lights before starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically – see page 124. Shortly after starting each journey the effectiveness of the b ra ke system should be tested at low speed and without inconveniencing other traffic, especially if the b ra kes are wet, e. g. after the vehicle has been washed. The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low and the handbrake is not applied, control indicator R in the instrument cluster illuminates – see page 99. Handbrake Brake system control indicator R Always apply the handbrake firmly without The control indicator illuminates when the actuating the release button; to do this fold ignition is switched on if the handbrake is up the armrest 3. Apply as fully as possible applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is on uphill or downhill inclines. too low. B rake fluid – see page 276. The mechanical handbrake acts on the 9 Warnin g brakes on the rear wheels. It engages automatically when applied. If the control indicator illuminates when To release the handbrake pull the lever up the handbrake is released, stop driving slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully immediately. Contact a workshop. lower the lever. To reduce the operating forces of the handbrake, depress the footbrake at the sam e time . 210 Driv in g and op era tio n

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u) Fault ABS continually monitors the brake system and prevents the wheels from locking 9 Warnin g regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip. If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subject to locking due to braking that It starts to regulate the braking pressure as is heavier than normal. The advantages soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. of ABS are no longer operational. The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an You can continue driving, provided you obstacle. Even in the case of full-on drive with care and anticipation. braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a round an obstacle without releasing the workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated brakes. into the system allows rapid fault Control indicator u for ABS identification. ABS control is made apparent through a It illuminates for a few seconds after the pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of ignition is turned on. The system is ready the regulation process. for operation when the control indicator 9 Warning extinguishes. If the control indicator does not go out For optimum braking, keep the brake after a few seconds, or if it illuminates pedal fully depressed throughout the whilst driving, there is a fault in the ABS. braking process, despite the fact that the The brake system remains operational pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the without ABS regulation. pressure on the pedal. Self-check Do not let this special safety feature Each time the ignition is turned on and the tempt you into taking risks when driving. engine started, after moving away from a speed of around 2 mph (3 km/h) the system Traffic safety can only be achieved by performs a self-check which may be adopting a responsible driving style. audible. Driving and operation 211

Wheels, tyres Changing tyre/wheel type Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring See page 297 for suitable tyres and Before changing to other tyres or wheels, system 3 restrictions. note the necessary changes. If y ou ha ve winte r tyre s or a fte rmarke t tyres of a different size fitted, sensors for Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to If tyres of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic the tyre pressure monitoring system can be the chassis and provide optimum driving retro-fitted by a workshop upon request. comfort and safety. speedometer may require reprogramming to ensure that the correct speed is Otherwise the system will not display tyre displayed. pressure deviations. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – 9 Warning see page 204.

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroadworthy. 212 Driv in g and op era tio n

Fitting new tyres Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge z Use wheel trims and tyres that are Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even for alloy wheels to protect against approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are: damage. If wheel trim is used on steel question a nd therefore meet all the z th e s ame size , wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the requirements pertaining to the z the same design, following procedure must be followed: respective wheel/tyre combination. z the same make, z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not z and have the same tread pattern. Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the have a beaded edge. direction of travel. The rolling direction is indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on 9 Warnin g the sidewall. Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction could lead to sudden loss of air and (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be thereby accidents. refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design properties of the tyre. Driving and operation 213

Tyre pressure In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring Incorrect tyre pressures will impair safety, Check tyre pressures, including the spare sy ste m 3 there is an adapter in the valve vehicle handling, comfort and fuel wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to cap key. Screw adapter to valve before economy and will increase tyre wear. any long journey; the tyres should be attaching tyre pressure gauge - If the pressure is too low, this can result in checked when cold. Don’t forget to check see page 204. considerable tyre warm-up and internal the spare. Tyre pressure - see page 299. damage, leading to tread separation and Use the v alve cap key to make unscrewing Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres even to ty re blow-out at high speeds. the valve caps easier. The key is located on are wa rm. O therwise the pressure may Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by the inside of the tank flap. drop below the permissible minimum when adjusting the tyre pressure. the tyres cool down. 9 Warnin g After having checked the tyre pressures, tighten the valve caps using the valve cap Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat key. tyre. 214 Driv in g and op era tio n

Check tyres regularly for damage (penetrated foreign bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls). Check wheels for damage. If damage or unusual wear is found, contact a workshop. 9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.

Tyre condition, wheel condition Tread depth Drive over edges slowly and at a right Check tread depth regularly. angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges If wear in the front is greater than that in can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel the rear, move the rear wheels to the front damage which is only noticed later on. axle and vice versa. When parking, ensure that the tyres are not Correct tyre pressure. pressed against the edge of the kerb. For reasons of safety, tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm). Driving and operation 215

General information Tyre designations z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if Meanings: the tyres are worn. e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H z Tyres age, even if they are used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which 195 =Tyre width in mm has not been used for six years should be 65 = Cross-section ratio used with care. (tyre height to width) in % z Never fit used tyres the previous history R = Belt type: Radial and use of which you do not know. 15 = Wheel d ia meter in inch z So as not to impair brake cooling, use 91 = Load index e.g. 91 corresponds only wheel trims approved for use on to 618 kg your vehicle. H = Speed code letter Speed code letters: The legally permissible minimum tread depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) the tread has worn down as far as one of the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) wear indicators are spaced at equal T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) intervals around the tyre within the tread. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Their position is indicated by markings on V up to 150 mph (240 km/h) the tyre sidewall. W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

1) TW I = Tread Wear Indicato r. 216 Driv in g and op era tio n

Winter tyres 3 If the m aximum p ermissible speed for the Wheel trims 3 For notes on fitting new tyres – winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, If the wheel trims and tyres used are not see page 212. a notice indicating the maximum Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the See page 299 for restrictions. permissible speed for the tyres must be tyres do not have a beaded edge - affixed within the driver’s field of vision1). see page 212. W inte r tyre s im prove safe ty at tem peratures below 7 °C and should If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted therefore be fitted on all the wheels. with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s driveability may be affected, especially on The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they slippery road surfaces. Obtain a have limited qualities for winter driving. replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the w heel balanced and fitted to the vehicle.

1) Va ries fr om cou nt ry to co unt ry on a c cou nt o f nation al regulations. Driving and operation 217

Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into Temporary wheel 3 contact with parts of the chain and be Tyre chains must not be used on the damaged. R emove the wheel trim – temporary spare wheel. If you need to use see page 239. tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, Ty re chains may only be used at speeds up fit the temporary spare on the rear axle to 30 mph (50 km/h)1) and, when travelling and transfer one of the rear wheels to the on roads that are free of snow, they may be front axle. used for brief periods only since they are For notes on the temporary spare wheel – subject to rapid wear on a hard road and see page 237. may snap. Wheel changing – see page 238. Correct tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204. Tyre chains 3 Restrictions and further information – see page 299. Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve a concentric fit. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock).

1) Va ries fr om cou nt ry to co unt ry on a c cou nt o f nation al regulations. 218 Driv in g and op era tio n

Roof racks 3 9 Warning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passenge rs must b e informed accordingly.

For safety reasons and to avoid roof damage, we recommend using the Vauxhall roof rack system approved for your vehicle. Fasten the roof rack following the instructions that accompany the system. Version without roof railing Version with roof ra iling 3 Fold covers of installation openings Attach roof rack to roof railing at points Driving hints – see page 184. up wards. shown in illustration - see enclosed roof Attach roof rack at appropriate points - luggage rack system instructions. see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Driving and operation 219

Towing equipment 3 9 Warning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passenge rs must b e informed accordingly.

Only use a caravan/trailer towing device approved for the vehicle. Have a towing device fitted by workshop, who will inform you of any possible caravan/trailer load increases. They will have the instructions for fitting the device and any necessary Towing equipment with Fitting the coupling b all b ar changes to the vehicle concerning cooling, 3 Compress the sealing plugs at the ends heat shields or other devices. removable coupling ball bar , Saloon / Hatch 3 and pull out of the opening for the coupling ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar 9 Warning luggage compartment. Disengage socket The coupling ball bar is stored in a bag and fold down 3. The coupling ball bar is to be removed strapped to the spare wheel. when not towing. 6

For installation dimensions of the caravan/trailer towing equipment – see pages 311, 312. 220 Driv in g and op era tio n

Checking the tensioning of the coupling Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Inserting the coupling ball bar ball bar: tensioned before it is inserted into the Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the z Red marking on turn knob points coupling housing: coupling housing and push firmly upwards towards green marking on coupling ball z Open coupling ball bar, until you hear the coupling ball bar bar. z Pull turn knob out and then turn it engaging. z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between clockwise as far as it will go – The turn knob snaps back into its home rotary knob and coupling ball bar. see illustration. position resting against the coupling ball z Key is in lock. bar. 9 Warnin g

Do not touch the turn knob when inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of injury. Driving and operation 221

Imp or tant Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly installed: z Red marking on turn knob points towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn knob and coupling ball bar. z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly in coupling housing. z Coupling ball bar must be locked and key must be removed.

Open coupling ball bar. Remove key and 9 Warning Dismounting the coupling b all b ar put on provided protective clip. Close coupling ball bar. Towing is permitted only with a correctly When the coupling b all bar is locked the fitted towbar. If the towbar cannot be Pull the turn knob out and then turn it turn knob can no longer be pulled out. fitted correctly, contact a workshop. clockw ise as far as it will go. Pull the coupling ball bar downwards out of the coupling housing and stow it in the Eye for break-away stopping cable luggage compartment – see page 219, In the case of caravans/trailers with brake, Fig. 17729 J. attach the break-away stopping cable to the eye. Ey e - see Fig. 17721 J. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket – see page 219, Fig. 17717 J. Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other high-pressure cleaners to clean the coupling ball bar. 222 Driv in g and op era tio n

Towing equipment with pivoting Push the release lever down; the LED on the Important coupling ball bar 3 lever is illuminated while the coupling ball Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly Folding out the c oupling b all ba r bar is not engaged. A warning buzzer also engaged: The release lever is in the stowage sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots z LED is not illuminated. down. compartment to the left in the luggage z No warning buzzer. compartment. 9 Warning To open the stowage compartment, push both latches down and open the cover. Mak e sure that no one is in the pivot zone of the coupling ball bar. Risk of bodily injury.

Swivel the coupling ball bar backwards until it engages (see Fig. 17726 J). The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cease. Otherwise, repeat the procedure. Driving and operation 223

Caravan/trailer towing 9 Warning Carava n and tra iler loads1) The permissible caravan/trailer loads are Caravan/trailer towing is permissible only vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent when the c oupling ba ll bar is engag ed maximum values which must not be correctly. If the coupling ball bar cannot exceeded. The actual caravan/trailer load be engaged correctly, the LED does not is the difference between the actual gross go out or the warning buzz er does not go weight of the caravan/trailer and the off. Seek the assistance of a workshop. actual coupling socket load with the caravan/trailer attached. When the Caravan/trailer with break-away cable 3 caravan/trailer load is being checked, For caravans/trailers with brakes, loop therefore, only the caravan/trailer wheels – break-away cable around coupling ball and not the joc key wheel – m ust be bar. standing on the weighing apparatus. Stowing the coupling ball b ar The permissible caravan/trailer loads for Open the stowage compartment – your vehicle are given in the vehicle see page 222. documents. Unless otherwise stated, they Push the release lever down; the LED on are valid for gradients up to max. 12%. the lever remains illuminated as long as the coupling ball bar is not engaged. A warning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots down. Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and up. The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the proc edure.

1) Observe national regulations. 224 Driv in g and op era tio n

The permissible caravan/trailer load should The actual caravan/trailer load plus the Coupling socket load be fully utilised only by drivers who are actual gross weight of the towing vehicle The coupling socket load is the load adequately experienced in towing large or must not exceed the maximum permitted exerted by the caravan/trailer on the heavy caravans/trailers. towing weight. For example, if the coupling ball. It can be varied by changing The permitted caravan/trailer load applies permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised, the weight distribution when loading the up to the specified incline and up to an the caravan/trailer load must only be used caravan/trailer. altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level. until the maximum permitted towing The maximum permissible coupling socket Since engine power decreases as altitude weight is reached. The maximum load (Saloon / Hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 kg) increases because of the air becom ing permitted towing weight is shown on the is specified on the towing equipment thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, identification plate - see page 282. identification plate and in the vehicle the permitted towing weight also documents. Alw ays aim for the maximum decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of load, especially in the case of heavy additional altitude. The towing weight caravans/trailers. The coupling socket load does not have to be reduced when driving should never fall below 25 kg. on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%, When measuring the coupling socket load, e.g. motorways). make sure that the drawbar of the loaded caravan/trailer is at the same height as it will be when the caravan/trailer is coupled with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly important for caravans/trailers with tandem axle. Driving and operation 225

Rear axle load during towing Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) W hen the carava n/ trailer is coup le d up and TSA monitors vehicle movements when the towing vehicle is fully loaded, including towing a caravan/trailer. If the system all occupants, the permissible rear axle detects lurching movements, engine power load (for information - see the is reduced while the vehicle and identification plate or vehicle caravan/trailer combination is selectively documentation) may be exceeded by 50 braked until the lurching ceases. kg. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating must TSA is a function of the Electronic Stability not be exceeded in the process. Programme (ESP®Plus) - see page 196. On the increased payload version 3, the permissible rear axle load may be exceeded by 65 kg. If the permissible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) must be applied. If lower Tyre pressure national speed limits are prescribed for Adjust the tyre pressure on the towing vehicles towing caravans/trailers, these vehicle to the value specified for a full load must be observed. - see page 299. Also check the pressure of the caravan/trailer wheels and the spare wheel. 226 Driv in g and op era tio n

Driving chara cteristics, tow ing tip s Turn signal control indicator – see page 98. If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, For caravans/trailers with brakes, attach The parking distance sensors at the rear 3 depress the brake pedal as hard as 3 break-away cable to eye or loop around are deactivated when towing a possible. coupling ball bar if no eye available. caravan/trailer. Remember that the braking distance for Before attaching the caravan/trailer, Handling is greatly influenced by the vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and lubricate the ball of the caravan/trailer loading of the caravan/trailer. Loads without brake is always greater than that towing device. However, do not lubricate should there fore be se cured so that they for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer. the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the cannot slip and be placed in the centre of When driving downhill, the brakes are coupling ball, is being used to damp the caravan/trailer if possible, i.e. above under considerably more load when towing snaking. the axle. a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in Check caravan/trailer lighting before In the case of trailers with low driving the same gear as if driving uphill and drive starting to drive. The fog tail light on the at a sim ila r spe ed . stability or caravans with a permitted vehicle is deactivated when towing a Gross Ve hicle W e ight of 1400 k g (Saloon / Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 caravan/trailer. Hatch)/1500 kg (Estate), do not exceed a in Automatic mode will automatically Caravan/trailers with LED turn signals must speed of 50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a select the driving programme with the have a provision that makes it possible to friction-type stabiliser is highly optimum engine braking effect. monitor standard light bulbs. recommended. If necessary, the gears can also be selected Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h) manually. if possible, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and a void sud den manoeuvres. If the caravan/trailer starts to sway, drive more slowly, do not attempt to correct the steering and brake sharply if necessary. Driving and operation 227

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its For vehicles with automatic transmission 3 cooling power is therefore independent of or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode it is the engine speed. sufficient to apply full throttle. Since a considerable amount of heat is Before starting-off under extreme generated at high engine speeds and less conditions (high combination weight, at slower speeds, do not shift down when mountainous terrain with steep inclines), climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping switch off all unnecessary electrical loads with the gradient in the higher gear. (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning 3 3 Diesel engines: On rising gradients of 10% system , heated seats ). or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission 3, do not e xce ed 25 mp h (40 km/h) in position 1. Starting on inclines For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting-off on an incline is between 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop during this procedure. 228 Self-help, vehicle care

Self-help, vehicle care 9 Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to Diesel fuel system, bleeding ...... 228 injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle Bonnet ...... 228 passengers must be informed Starting ...... 229 accordingly. Towing ...... 232 Warning triangle ¨3, Diesel fuel system, bleeding first-aid kit +3...... 234 Never let the tank run dry. If control Spare wheel 3 ...... 236 indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as Jac k £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ...... 238 possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes. Changing wheels ...... 238 Restarting after running out of fuel is Tyre repair kit 3 ...... 242 possible, but starting behaviour will be Electrical system ...... 246 delayed. Turn on the ignition three times Bonnet Fuses and the most important circuits for 15 seconds each time. Then start the To open the bonnet, pull the release lever they p rotect ...... 248 engine for a maximum of 40 seconds. If it located on the driver’s side below the Bulb replacem ent ...... 252 does not start, repeat the process after instrument panel. The bonnet will then be waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still Halogen headlight system, dipped unlocked and will partially open. R eturn does not start, contact a workshop. and main beam ...... 253 release lever to its original position. Xenon headlight system, dipped and main beam ...... 255 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) sy ste m 3 ...... 257 Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, parking lights ..... 257 Tail lights ...... 258 Numb er plate light ...... 261 Courtesy lig ht ...... 262 Vehicle care...... 264 Self-help, vehicle care 229

Starting Do not sta rt with quick charger This prevents damage to electronic components. Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing Because your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, it must not be started by pushing or towing – see page 190. The v ehicle can only be started using jum p leads – see following page.

There is a safety catch on the underside of To hold the bonnet open, insert the support the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the located at the side in the small slot on the bonnet. underside of the bonnet. Dirt or snow on the bonnet may drop onto Before closing, fasten the support in its the windscreen when the bonnet is opened retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to and block the air intake. fall into its catch. Air intake – see page 166. Check that the bonnet is locked in position by pulling at its front edge. If it is not engaged, repeat the procedure. 230 Self-help, vehicle care

Starting the engine with jump leads 3 A vehicle with a discharged battery can be started using jump leads and the battery of another vehicle. Attempts to start the vehicle should be made at intervals of one minute and should not last longer than 15 seconds 9 Warning

Be extremely careful when starting with jump leads. Any deviation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the e lec trical sy ste ms of z Wear eye protection and protective z Switch off all unnecessary electrical both vehicles. clothing when handling a battery. consumers. z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage z Do not lean over the battery during jump z Never expose the battery to naked (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be starting. flames or sparks. considerably less than that of the z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to z A discharged battery can freeze at discharged battery. Voltage and touch those of the other lead. temperatures of around 0°C. Always capacity information can be found on thaw out a frozen batteries in a warm the batteries. z Do not allow the vehicles to touch while jump starting. room before attaching jump leads. z Use jump leads with insulated terminals 2 z Do not allow battery fluid to come into and a cross section of at least 16 mm z Apply handbrake. M anual transmission 2 or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or (25 mm for diesel engines). transmission 3 in P. painted surfaces. The fluid contains z Do not disconnect the discharged sulphuric acid which can cause injuries battery from the vehicle. The battery is in a box at the front of the and damag e in the event of direct engine compartment, on the right-hand contact. side as viewed from the front. To open the box, pull the cover forwards and swing it upwards. Self-help, vehicle care 231

z Do not connect leads to negative z Start the engine of the vehicle providing terminal of discharged battery. the jump start. z The connection point should be as far z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. away from the discharged battery as Start attempts should be made at possible. intervals of 1 minute and should not last z Route the leads so that they cannot longer than 15 seconds. catch on rotating parts in the engine z After starting, allow both engines to idle compartment. for approx. 3 minutes with the leads connected. z In order to avoid excess voltage in the ele ctric al sy ste m, b efore re moving a lead, switch on an electrical consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the Connect the leads in the order shown in the vehicle receiving the jump start. illustration: z Reverse above sequence exactly when 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to removing leads. the positive terminal 1 of the battery providing the jump start (identified by "+" sign on battery case or terminal). 2. Connect the other end of this lead to the positive terminal 2 of the discharged battery ("+" sign). 3. Connect the first end of the other jump lead to the negative terminal 3 of the battery providing the start ("–" sign). 4. Connect the other end of the second ju mp lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 232 Self-help, vehicle care

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle. 9 Warnin g

For braking and steering, significantly hig her forces are required: brake assistance and steering assistance are effective only with the engine running.

To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from the towing vehicle, switch on the air recirculation 3 and close the windows. Vehicles with automatic transmission 3 Towing Screw in the front towing ey e anticlockwise should be towed facing forwards only and Towing your own vehicle as far as it will go until it stops in a must not be towed faster than 50 mph To open the cover concealing the towing horizontal position. (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km). eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow If the transmission is defective, or if the disengage the cover at the bottom and pull ro d 3 – to the eye. above speed or distance is to be exceeded, it off downwards. the front axle must be raised off the The front towing eye may be used only for ground. The front towing eye is located in the towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it. compartment containing the jack and Switch on ignition to release steering vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in the luggage compartment. Jack and co lu m n lo ck an d t o pe r mit o pe ra tio n o f brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. vehicle tools – see page 238. Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N. Self-help, vehicle care 233

Contact a workshop. If the automatic clutch is released manually after a power failure on vehicles with Easytronic 3 , towing is not permitted - see page 175. In this case, contact a workshop immediately.

After towing, unscrew front towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap. Towing service Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on towing costs before employing any towing service. In this way you avoid Towing another vehicle Screw in the rear towing eye anticlockwise unnecessary costs and possible insurance To op en the cover c oncealing the towing as far as it will go until it stops in a problems during claim processing. eye socket at the rear right of the v ehicle: horizontal position. disengage the cover at the bottom and pull Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow it off downwards. rod 3 – to the eye. The rear towing eye is located in the The rear towing eye may be used only for compartment containing the jack and towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it. vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in the luggage compartment. Jack and Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive vehicle tools – see page 238. tractive force can damage the vehicle. After towing, unscrew rear towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap. 234 Self-help, vehicle care

Warning triangle ¨3, To access press down bar and open the When loading vehicle, always ensure that first-aid kit +3 cover. first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is accessible. Saloon / Hatch Depending on the warning triangle version, The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ move locking lever upwards and therefore cushion are stowed in the side panel trim clamp warning triangle in position. on the left-hand side. Self-help, vehicle care 235

When loading vehicle, always ensure that warning triangle and first-aid cushion or first-aid kit are accessible.

Estate To open, push both bars down and open The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ the flap. cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side. 236 Self-help, vehicle care

Spare wheel 3 Estat e To open the loading floor, fold out release Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre The spare wheel is located in the luggage lever by pushing at the marked point and repair kit instead of a spare wheel. compartment under the load floor. It is raise up the loading floor all the way. See page 242. secured with a plastic wing nut. Stowing standard size tyres in the spare Saloon / Hatch wheel well The spare wheel is located in the luggage The spare wheel well is not designed for all compartment under the floor cover. It is sizes of permissible tyres. If a larger wheel secured with a plastic wing nut. must be stowed in the spare wheel well after changing wheels, place the floor To open the floor cover, p ull up the handle cover on the protruding wheel. or strap. Self-help, vehicle care 237

Genera l informa tion Notes on temporary spare wheel 3 Notes on directional tyres 3 Depending on the model variant, the spare z Using a temporary spare wheel Directional tyres only achieve their full wheel is in the form of an temporary may change the driving behaviour of performa nc e potential when mounted in spare wheel 3. Please pay attention the vehicle, particularly if using winter the prescribed direction of rotation. If after to instructions concerning temporary tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly a flat tyre the tyre or spare wheel is spare wheel in the next column and on as possible, balance wheel and fit to mounted against the prescribed direction pages 217, 242, 299. vehicle. of rotation, observe the following: z Driving conditions may be altered. On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare z Fit only one temporary spare wheel. Replac e the defective tyre a s soon as wheel may have a steel rim. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph possible, balance the wheel and mount it If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel (80 km/h). on the vehicle. may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you z Take curves slowly. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling (80 km/h). may be altered. Obtain a replacement for z Do not use the temporary spare wheel the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and for a lengthy period. z Drive especially carefully in wet or snowy have the wheel balanced and fitted to the z Replace temporary spare wheel with full weather. vehicle. specification wheel without delay. For further information on directional The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre z Tyre chains are not permitted on the tyres – see page 211. and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains 1) on the vehicle : Using the spare wheel may have to be used after a front wheel alter vehicle handling. Have the defective puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the the wheel and have it mounted on the front axle. Check tyre pressure and vehicle. correct if necessary - see page 299. z Please follow instructions concerning temporary spare wheel on pages 217 and 299.

1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. 238 Self-help, vehicle care

Changing wheels There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel – see page 242. To ensure your safety, make the following preparations and observe the following information when changing wheels: z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non- skid surface . z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply handbrake, automatic transmission 3 - selector lever in P, manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 After use, stow away the jack and tools in z Correctly set up the warning triangle. The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been the compartment as shown in illustration. Warning triangle – see page 234. specially developed for your vehicle and must only be used on that vehicle. Only use jack for changing w heels. Vehicles w ith tyre rep air kit 3 The vehicle tools are stored in the luggage compartment together with the tyre repair kit in a compartment beneath the floor cover. Vehicles with spare wheel 3 The jack and vehicle tools are loca ted in a compartment in the luggage compartment, beneath the spare wheel. To remove the spare wheel - see page 236. Self-help, vehicle care 239 z Remove spare wheel from luggage z If the ground on which the vehicle is compartment - see page 236. standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm 3 z Before raising the vehicle, set the front thick) should be placed under the jack . wheels to the straight-ahead position. Using a thicker board could damage the jack 3 and the vehicle. z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn z before raising the vehicle, but do not No people or animals may be in the totally unscrew the bolts. vehicle when it is jacked-up. z z Never change more than one wheel at Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle. on ce . z Do not start or run the engine while the z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the vehicle is on the jac k. wheel to be changed by placing wedge z Before inserting the wheel bolts when blocks or equivalent in front and behind changing wheels, lightly grease the cone th e wh ee l. of each bolt. For this reason, carry some 1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook z conventional grease. Use the jack only to change wheels. included with the vehicle tools 3 . For vehicle tools - se e p age 238. If the wheel trim has visible wheel bolts 3, the trim can remain on the wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts must not be removed. 240 Self-help, vehicle care

Alloy whee ls 3: Disengage the wheel bolt 2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the 3. There are plastic retainers at the front caps with a screwdriver and remove. wheel bolt wrench 3, pushing the and rear of the vehicle underbody for Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth wrench 3 on as far as possible. positioning the jack. The location of each between the screwdriver and alloy retainer is indicated by a mark on the wheel. bottom edge of the vehicle. Self-help, vehicle care 241

4. Before attaching jack 3 set to required Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the turn crank to raise vehicle. wheel – see page 236, notes on 3 ja ck at the front – or rear – in such a If this is not the case, carefully lower the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. way that the jack head engages in the vehicle immediately and reposition the 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly, plastic retainer beneath the vehicle. jack. inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far Check that it is properly engaged. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with as possible. The jack b ase must be on the ground a cloth. Then apply a light coating of 8. Lower vehicle. directly below the jacking point in a grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease manner that prevents it from slipping. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on the thread of the bolts. Do not put the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. wheel bolts down in a location where they may become soiled. 6 If the wheel bolts have retaining washers 3, they must not be removed. 242 Self-help, vehicle care

10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clea n the 11.Stow away replaced wheel, tools and Tyre repair kit 3 wheel around the retaining clips. Valve warning triangle in the luggage Minor damage to the tyre tread or side sy mbol 3 on back of wheel trim must compartment - see page 238. wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be point towards valve on wheel. 12.Check the tyre pressure of the newly repaired using the tyre repair kit. Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt mounted wheel. Correct if necessary. Do not remove the foreign body from the 3 caps . 13.Have the tightening torque of the wheel tyre. Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel bolts on the new wheel checked on the Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on bolt caps 3. vehicle using a torque wrench as soon the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre as possible and, if necessary, corrected. repair kit. Tightening torque – see page 299. 14.Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel 9 Warnin g that was removed. Driving with tyre pressures too low or 3 15.Replace temporary spare wheel with tyres deflated can cause invisible a full specification wheel without delay. damage to the tyre. This damage cannot be eliminated with a tyre repair kit. Park the vehicle and contact a workshop.

Important information – see page 246. In the event of a flat tyre: z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply handbrake; for automatic transmission 3, move selector lever to P; for manual transmission or Easytronic 3, select 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle. Warning triangle – see page 234. Self-help, vehicle care 243

The tyre repair kit is in a compartment in 3. Remove the electrical connection cable 4. Screw the compressor air hose to the the spare wheel well of the luggage and air hose from the stowage connection on the sealant bottle. compartment. compartments on the underside of the 5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on 1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit compressor. the compressor. from the compartment. Carefully remove Set the compressor near the tyre in such the components from the pouch. a way that the sealant bottle is upright. 2. Remove the compressor. 6. Remove the valve cap from the defective tyre. 244 Self-help, vehicle care

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve. 11. S et the rocker switch on the compressor If the specified tyre pressure is not 8. The switch on the compressor must be to I. The tyre is filled with sealant. reached within 10 minutes, remove the set to § . 12.While the sealant bottle drains (approx. tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle through 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in 9. Connect the compressor plug to the either direction. Reconnect the tyre accessory socket or cigarette lighter the compressor briefly points to 6 bar (87 psi). Pressure then sinks again. repair kit and continue the filling sock et. Accessory socket – see pag e 93. process for 10 minutes. If the specified 10. Switch on ignition. 13.All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled w ith is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle To prev ent battery discharge, we air. and contact a workshop. recommend that you leave the engine running. 14. The prescribed tyre pressure – see page 299 should be reached within 10 minutes. Sw itch off the compressor when the correct pressure is obtained. Self-help, vehicle care 245

Drain excess tyre pressure with the 18. The enclosed sticker shows the button over the pressure indicator. maximum permitted speed at which the Do not run the compressor for more tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in than 10 minutes - see "Important the driver’s field of vision. information" on page 246. 19.Continue driving immediately to allow 15. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the the sealant to distribute evenly filler hose to the free connection on the throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. sealant bottle. This prevents sealant 6 miles / 10 km (but no more than leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the 10 minutes) and chec k tyre pressure. luggage compartment. Screw the compressor air hose directly onto the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T). 16. Wipe aw ay any sealant spill with a cloth. 17. Dismantle the w arning triangle and stow it in the luggage compartment – As long as the tyre pressure is more see page 234. than 1.3 bar (19 psi), it may be adjusted to the p rescrib ed v alue. Repeat the procedure until there is no more pressure loss. If the tyre pressure has fallen below 1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle may no longer be used. Contact a workshop. 20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage compartment – see page 242. 246 Self-help, vehicle care

Im portant The sealant can only be stored for approx. Electrical system 4 years. After this time, the sealing 9 Warning properties can no longer be guaranteed. 9 Warnin g Heed the expiration date on the sealant Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph bottle. Electronic ignition systems generate very (80 km/h). high voltages. Do not touch the ignition The sealant bottle can only be used once. Do not use the temporary spare wheel for Replace a used sealant bottle. system; high voltage can be fatal. a lengthy period. The compressor and sealant can be used Fuses Steerability and driving behaviour may from approx. -30 °C. There are three fusebox es in the v ehicle: be impaired. Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in In the passenger compartment on the far accordance with applicable legislation. left of the instrument panel, in the stowage The driving characteristics of the repaired The adapter 3 supplied may be used to compartment on the left in the luggage tyre is severely affected, therefore have this pump up other objects, such a s b alls, compartment, and at the front of the tyre replaced. airbeds, dinghies. engine compartment. If the compressor makes abnormal noises This is located on the underside of the or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least compressor. To remove, unscrew the 30 minutes. compressor air hose and pull out the The integrated safety valv e opens a t a adapter. pressure of 7 bar (102 psi). When using the tyre repair kit, no consumer Protect the compressor from moisture and may be connected to the front accessory rain. socket at the same time. Self-help, vehicle care 247

We recommend carrying a complete set of Before replacing a fuse, turn off the Only install fuses of the specified rating. fuse s. respective switch and the ignition. Each fuse has its rating written on it, in Spare fuses are kept on back of fusebox A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be addition the fuses are colour coded. cover in the instrument panel. For opening recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse Fuse, Fuse , cover – see next page. should only be installed after the cause of the fault has been rectified. colour rating Light brown 5 A There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the fusebox cover in the instrument panel for Dark brown 7.5 A changing fuses – see illustration above. Red 10 A Light blue 15 A Yellow 20 A White 25 A Light green 30 A Orange 40 A Dark blue 60 A 248 Self-help, vehicle care

No. Circuit Ra ting 10 Steering column module 7.5 A control unit 11 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 12 Battery overload protection 10 A 13 –– 14 –– 15 Door module control unit 30 A 16 –– 17 instruments, information 15 A display 18 –– Fuses and the m ost importan t Some circuits may be protected by several circuits they protect fuses. 19 –– Pl us Fusebox in passenger compartment No. Circuit Ra ting 20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP® )7.5 A The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of 1 Infotainment system, radio 20 A 21 –– the instrum ent panel. O pen door. transport fuse 22 Cigarette lighter 30 A Disengage cover by pulling firmly and remove. 2 Interior fan, heating, air 7.5 A 23 Interior fan, air conditioning, 30 A conditioning system Electronic Climate Control 40 A Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 3 Sunroof 20 A 24 –– 4 ––25 Heating, air conditioning 7.5 A 5 Door module control unit 7.5 A system 6 Brake light 7.5 A 26 Instruments, information 7.5 A display 7 Bodywork module control 30 A unit 8 Front passenger’s door 30 A module control unit 9 Central control unit 7.5 A Self-help, vehicle care 249

No. Circuit Rating 11 Battery voltage 25 A 12 Seat heating, rear left 15 A 13 Towing equipment 20 A 14 Tailgate wiper 15 A 15 Heated seats, seat climate 15 A control, left front 16 Seat heating, front right 15 A 17 Accessory socket 15 A 18 Tailgate locking, Estate 30 A 19 Terminal 30, Twin Audio 10 A Fusebox in luggage compartment Some circuits may be protected by several 20 Tank flap locking 7.5 A The fusebox is located on the left side of fuses. 21 Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall 5 A the luggage compartment, in the stowage alarm system compartment. No. Circuit Rating 1 ––22 Electrically op erated 30 A Saloon / Hatch: tailgate Press the latch down and open the cover. 2 –– 23 Glass breakage sensor 7. 5 A 3 Electric seat adjustment, 40 A Estate: (Vauxhall alarm system) Press both latches down and open the driver’s seat 24 Battery voltage 25 A cover and interior trim. 4 Heated rear window 40 A 25 Electronic chassis 10 A Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 5 Electric seat adjustment, 40 A front passenger’s seat 26 Terminal 15 (starter 25 A switch), Twin Audio 6 Electric window operation, 30 A right rear 27 Seat occupancy 5 A recognition, tyre pressure 7 Electric window operation, 30 A monitoring sy ste m, rain left rear sensor, air conditioning 8 Seat heating, rear right 15 A system 9 Horn, Vauxhall alarm 15 A 28 Parking distance sensors 7.5 A system 29 –– 10 Fuel pump 20 A 250 Self-help, vehicle care

Some circuits may be protected by several fuse s. No. Circuit Rating 1 Engine electronics, 20 A transm ission elec tronics 2 Starter 25 A 3 Horn 20 A 4 Air conditioning system, 10 A Electronic Climate Control 5 W ind scre en wa sh system, 15 A front and rear 6 Diesel fuel filter heating 30 A Fusebox in engine compartment Disengage the bar at the front of the cover The fusebox is in the box at the front of the of fusebox and swing it upwards. engine compartment. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 9 Warning

Switch off engine before op ening the fusebox in the engine compartment, risk of in ju ry.

To open, disengage front battery cover and tilt upwards. Self-help, vehicle care 251

No. Circuit Rating 27 Easytronic 30 A 28 Tailgate module control unit 60 A 29 ABS 40 A 30 Tailgate module control unit 60 A 31 Vehicle interior module 60 A control unit 32 ABS 40 A 33 Vehicle interior module 60 A control unit 34 Tailgate module control unit 60 A 1) No. Circuit R ating No. Circuit Ra ting 35 Cooling fan 30 A 40 A 7 Central control unit, ESP®Pl us 15 A 17 –– 36 Cooling fan1) 20 A 8 Headlights, windscreen 10 A 18 –– 30 A wash nozzles 19 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 15 A Brake servo 30 A 9 Power steering, brake servo 7.5 A headlight range adjustment 5A 37 Adaptive Forward Lighting: Insert 10 Adaptive Forward Lighting 10 A 20 Headlight range adjustment 5 A Slot for changing to any 11 Windscreen wiper 30 A 21 ––symmetrical dipped beam maxi- Pl us for driving abroad - fuse 12 Central control unit, ESP® 7.5 A 22 Windscreen wiper 30 A see page 136 13 Headlight w ash system 30 A 23 Auxiliary heating 20 A 38 –– 14 Oxygen sensor 10 A 24 Battery voltage, terminal 30 30 A 15 Engine control unit1) 10 A 25 Battery voltage, terminal 30 30 A 16 ABS 5 A 26 ––

1) The brake lights are on all the time if the fuse 1) is d efec t iv e an d t he i gni t io n is swi tc hed on. Depending on engine. 252 Self-help, vehicle care

Bulb replacement Headlight aiming Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off We recommend that headlight adjustment and switch relevant switch off. be carried out by a workshop which will have special equipment. Only hold new bulb at base. Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise Manual headlight range adjustment 3 fingerprints on the glass evaporate. must be set to 0 when adjusting the Residue builds up on the reflector headlights. eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. Replacement bulb must be in accordance with data on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wattage given on bulb base. To change the lights on the left-hand side, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system fluid container to gain better access: disengage retaining clamp and withdraw filler neck by pulling upw ards. Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full. 9 Warning

Protect the environment. Do not allow wash fluid to seep into the ground or drain into the sewage system.

As the headlight has to be removed, have the bulb on the right changed by a workshop. Self-help, vehicle care 253

Halogen headlight system, Dipped beam 4. Push down bulb at bulb holder. dipped and main beam 1. Open bonnet. 6 Headlights with separate systems for main 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 filler neck from windscreen wash system (outer bulbs). fluid container - see page 252. As the hea dlight has to b e re moved , have the bulb on the right changed by a workshop. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 254 Self-help, vehicle care

5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from 6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting. Main beam the reflector. 7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting, 1. Open bonnet. without touching the glass. 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove 8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on filler neck from windscreen wash system the bulb mounting engage in the fluid container - see page 252. As the recesses in the reflector. headlight has to be removed, have the 9. Engage the bulb holder. bulb on the right changed by a workshop. 10.Reposition the headlight cover and turn it clockwise. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 11.After changing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler neck for 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. windscree n wa sh sy ste m fluid containe r - see page 252. Self-help, vehicle care 255

5. Press spring wire clip forwards, 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. Xenon headlight system, disengage to the right and open. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the dipped and main beam lugs in the recesses on the reflector He adlights with separate sy ste ms for main without touching the glass. beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector (outer bulbs). onto bulb. Dipped beam 9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn it clockwise. 9 Warnin g 10.After changing the bulb on the left, The dipped beam works with very high insert and engage filler neck for electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of windscree n wa sh sy ste m fluid containe r fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a - see page 252. workshop.

6 256 Self-help, vehicle care

Main beam 5. P res s sp rin g w ire clip fo rwards , 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 1. Open bonnet. disengage to the right and open. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove lugs in the recesses on the reflector fille r n eck fro m win dscre en wa sh s ys tem without touching the glass. fluid container - see page 252. As the 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector headlight has to be removed, have the onto bulb. bulb on the right changed by a 9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn workshop. it clockwise. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise 10. After changing the bulb on the left, and remove. insert and engage filler neck for 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. windscreen wash system fluid container - see page 252. Self-help, vehicle care 257

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3 Xenon headlight system for main and dipped beam together with curve illumination based on steering angle. 9 Warning

Xenon headlights operate at very high voltage. Do not touch, risk of fatal injury. Only have bulbs for dipped beam, main beam, turn lighting, parking lights and turn signal lights changed by a workshop. Halogen headlight system, 4. Remove parking light bulb holder from Xenon headlight system, reflector. pa rk in g lights 6 1. Open bonnet. 2. To change the bulb on the left, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system fluid container - see page 252. As the hea dlight has to b e re moved , have the bulb on the right changed by a workshop. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 258 Self-help, vehicle care

Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, front turn signal lights Have bulbs changed by a workshop. Side turn signal lights Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Front fog ligh ts 3 Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

5. Remove bulb from socket. Ta il lights 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the Saloon / Hatch glass. 1. To open the stowage compa rtm ent, press down bar and open the cover. 7. Insert socket in reflector, position headlight cover and turn clockwise. 8. After changing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler neck for windscreen wash system fluid container - seepage252. Self-help, vehicle care 259

4. Re move bulb from socket. 5. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb housing. Connect plug. Close stowage compartment.

2. Detach plug connector from bulb Estate mounting. 1. Open the compartment on the left or right-hand side by pressing the latch 3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer down – see page 235. edges of bulb mounting towards each other and remove bulb mounting. 2. Hold the bulb housing from the outside, use a wheel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the Lights from top to bottom: retaining nuts and unscrew them by Turn signal light ha nd . Re move the bulb housing to the Tail light/brake light rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle Tail light tools on page 238. Fog tail light 3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing. Reversing light 6 260 Self-help, vehicle care

4. Undo the three screws using a 5. Remove bulb from socket. Bulbs in bulb Tailgate lights screwdriver and detach the bulb holder: Due to the large am ount of effort required, mounting. 1 = Brake/tail light bulbs should be replaced by a workshop. 2 = Turn signal light 1. Use a screwdriver to prise off the plastic plugs in the tailgate panelling to the 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the right and left of the tailgate lock. glass. R efit the bulb mounting and screw it into place. Position the bulb housing in the vehicle body and screw it into place. Close the compartment in the side trim. Self-help, vehicle care 261

2. Undo screws in handle of inner panelling 4. Unscrew corresponding holder: Number plate ligh t with torx screwdriver. 1 =Reversing light 1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert 3. Remove the inner panelling and clips 2 = Fog tail light as shown in illustration. Press to the side and release spring. from the tailgate. 3 =Reversing light 5. Re move bulb from socket. 6 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate. 7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate using the clips. Tighten the screw in the handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the openings. Lights in electrically operated tailgate 3 Have bulbs replaced by a workshop. 262 Self-help, vehicle care

2. Remove bulb housing downwards, 4. Rotate bulb holder to left and Courtesy light ta king care n ot to pull on th e cable . disengage. Front courtesy light, read ing lights 3 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Re move bulb from socket. To ensure that no power is supp lied to the lights, close the doors before removing. socke t. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 1. Lever the lens out of the housing recesses. 7. Insert light holder in bulb housing and engage by rotating clockwise. 8. Connect plug to bulb socket. 9. Insert and engage bulb housing. Self-help, vehicle care 263

2. Remove bulb from socket. Glove comp artm ent lighting, 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the luggage compartment lighting, and remove. 3 glass. footwell lig hting 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the To ensure that no power is supplied to the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. lights, close the doors or hold the contact Rear courtesy lights 3, switch depressed before removing. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. rear reading lights 3 1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver. Have bulbs changed by a workshop. Instrum ent illumination, inform ation disp lay illumina tion 3 Have bulbs changed by a workshop. 264 Self-help, vehicle care

Vehicle care Vehicle care aids 3 Washing When caring for your vehicle, observe all Vehicle wash: The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to national environmental regulations, z Wash brush, environmental influences, e.g. continuous particularly when washing it. z Car Shampoo, changes in w eather conditions, industrial z Car Sponges, waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so Regular, thorough care helps to improve z Insect Removal Sponge, wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When the appearance of your vehicle and z Wheel Cleaners, using automatic car washes, select a maintain its value over the years. It is also z Engine Cleaners, programme which includes waxing. a prerequisite for warranty claims for any z Glass Cleaners, Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen paint or corrosion damage. The following z Chamois Leather. pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if and the like should be cleaned off used properly, w ill help combat the Vehicle care: immediately, as they contain aggressive unavoidable damaging effects of the z Paintwork Cleaner, constituents which can cause paint environment. z Paintwork Polish, damage. z Cream Polish, Please follow the wash system z Metallic Paintwork Wax, manufacturer’s instructions when using z Hard wax, wash systems. The windscreen wiper and z Touch-up pens, the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and z Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint, the rear window wiper 3 must be switched z Wheel Preserver, off - see pages 11, 126. Unscrew the z Insect Remover, antenna rod 3 and the roof rack 3, z Window Cleaning Spray, standing on the door sill to make them z Lock Cylinder Grease, easier to reach. z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Alloy Wheel Preserver, If you wash your vehicle by hand, make z Rust Preventative, sure that the insides of the wings are also z Vauxhall De-icer Spray, thoroughly rinsed out. z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent, z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals. Interior care: z Interior/Upholstery Cleaner. Self-help, vehicle care 265

Clean edges and folds on opened doors Polishing Paintwork damage and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing is necessary only if the paint has Repair minor paintwork damage such as Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the become dull or if solid deposits have stone chips, scratches etc. immediately vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use become attached to it. using the Touch-up pen or Touch-Up/ separate leathers for paint and window Pa in t w o r k po lis h w it h s ilic on e f o rm s a Aerosol Paint before rust forms. If rust has surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows protective film, making waxing already formed, have a workshop will impair vision. unnecessary. elimina te the cause. Also check the surfaces and edges facing the road surface Observe national regulations. Plastic body parts should not be treated on which rust may have developed for Waxing with wax and polish. some time unnoticed. Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular Use Metallic Paintw ork Wax on vehicles Exterior lights after it ha s b ee n washe d using Car with a metallic-effect paint finish. Headlight and other protective light bezels Shampoo and at the latest when water no Wheels are made of plastic. If they require longer forms beads on the paintwork, Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to additional cleaning after the vehicle has otherwise the paintwork will dry out. clean the wheels. been wa shed , clean them w ith C ar Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or Also wax edge s and folds on opene d doors Wheels are painted a nd can be treated and flaps as well as the areas they cover. caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, with the same agents as the body. For alloy and do not clean them dry. wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel Preserver. 266 Self-help, vehicle care

Plastic and rubber parts Seat belts Windscreen wiper blades For additional cleaning of plastic and Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry. Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can rubber parts use Interior/Upholstery Clean only with lukewarm water or Interior/ cause streaking on the windscreen when Cleaner. Do not use any other agent, and Upholstery Cleaner. the wiper is used. in particular do not use solvents or petrol. Wi nd ows Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on When cleaning the heated rear w indow, a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen plastic and rubber parts. make sure that the heating element on the Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary – Wheels and tyres inside of the window is not damaged. see page 277. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather Locks wheels and tyres. in conjunction with Window Cleaning Spray The locks are lubricated with a high-quality Interior and upholstery and Insect Remover. Lock Cylinder Grease in the factory. Only use de-icer in urgent cases, since it has a Clean the vehicle interior, including the Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is de-greasing effect and affects the instrument panel facia, using Interior/ suitable for de-icing windows. Upholstery Cleaner. operation of the locks. Have the locks For mechanical removal of ice, use a regreased in a workshop after using The instrument panel should only be commercially available sharp-edged ice de-icer. cleaned using a soft damp cloth. scraper. Press the scraper firmly against Engine compa rtment Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum the glass so that no dirt can get under it Areas of the engine compartment that are cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use and scratch the glass. painted in the same colour as the vehicle Interior/U pholstery Cleaner that is suitable must be looked after like any other painted for both fabrics and vinyl. surface. Do not use cleaning agents such as It is ad visab le to wa sh the engine acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint compartment before and after winter and remover, nail varnish remover, washing preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could before washing the engine. damage seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed. Self-help, vehicle care 267

When washing the engine with a steam jet, Underbody Caution - commercially available bitumen/ do not direct the jet at components of the Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC rubber materials can damage the PVC Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), the air undercoating in the wheel arches coating. We recommend that you have conditioning system 3, the Electronic (including the longitudinal members) which underbody w ork carried out by a workshop Climate Control system 3, the auxiliary provides permanent protection and needs which knows the p rescrib ed materials and heater 3 or the belt drive or its no special maintenance. has ex perienc e in the use thereof. components. The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not The underbody should be washed Engine washing also removes subsequently covered by PVC are provided a durable following the end of the cold weather applied protective wax. Therefore after protective wax coating in critical areas. season to remove any dirt adhering to the washing, have a workshop protect the On vehicles which are washed frequently in underbody since this may also contain salt. engine, parts of the braking system in the automatic car washes with underbody Check protective wax coating and, if engine bay, axle elements with steering, washing facility, the protective wax necessary, have it restored to perfect body elements and cavities, thoroughly coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving condition. with protective wax. additives, so check the underbody after An engine wash can be performed in the washing and have it waxed if necessary. spring in order to remove dirt that has Before the start of the cold weather season, adhered to the engine compartment, check the PVC coating and protective wax which may also have a high salt content. coating and, if necessary, have them Check protective wax layer and make good restored to perfect condition. if necessary. Do not use high-pre ss ure jet clea ne rs in the engine compartment. 268 Service, maintenance

In our ex perience, the most com mon cause large investment in his business and is Service, maintenance of all complaints is the result of proud of his reputation and misunderstanding or lack of professionalism and fully realises that communication between the customer and satisfied customers are his key to success. the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In the unlikely event that you are still not We sincerely hope you will never have happy with the answer your Vauxhall cause to complain about your vehicle. Authorised Repairer has given, or the However, if things do go wrong, the best action he proposes to correct the problem, cours e of action for you to ta ke is to you may contact the Customer Care contact your Vauxhall Authorised Department1) where a team of Customer Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and Care Consultants will spare no effort to explain the difficulty you are having. We ensure your complete satisfaction. are confident they will do their utmost to Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Inspection system ...... 270 resolve the problem to your complete Customer Care, satisfaction. Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Griffin Hous e , Accessories ...... 271 Sometimes, however, despite the best of Osborne Road A note on safety ...... 271 intentions of all concerned, LUTON, Checking and topping up fluids ...... 271 misunderstandings can occur. If your Be ds. , LU1 3Y T problem has not been resolved to your Telephone: 0845 090 2044 Engine oil ...... 272 satisfaction, please make an appointment Diesel fuel filter ...... 274 They will review all the facts involved. Then to discuss the matter with the Manager of if it is felt some further action can be taken, Coolant ...... 274 the department concerned. Brake fluid ...... 276 the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be The majority of areas of concern can be advised accordingly. In any case, your Wind screen wiper ...... 277 quickly resolved in this way. contact will be acknowledged confirming W ind scre en and he adlight was h Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter. sy ste ms 3...... 279 Should you wish to pursue the matter Battery ...... 280 further, the Principal of the Vauxhall If you are not satisfied with the outcome, Protecting electronic components ..... 280 Authorised Repairer should be made you can if you wish, seek advice from an Vehicle decomm issioning...... 281 aware of your concern. It is advisable in independent third party such as: cases such as this to write to him to confirm Vehicle recommissioning...... 281 Autom obile Association (A.A.) your problem and the solutions that have Fanum House, Basing View, been offered. BASI NGSTOKE, You can be assured the Authorised Hants., R G21 4EA Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious to fully investigate your problems and correct any errors made. After all, he has a 1) Calls may be monitored and recorded for training purpo ses. Service, maintenance 269

Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C.), General Motors Belgium N.V. General Motors Hellas S.A. R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd. Noordelaan 401 - Haven 500 56 Kifisia s Av enue & De lfon str. 89-91 Pall Mall, 2030 Antw erp – Belgium Amarousion LONDON, SW1Y 5HS Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29 151 25 Athens – Greece The Customer Relations Department, General Motors Southeast Europe Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 Society of Motor Manufacturers and org. s lož ka General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.), Olbrachtova 9 Szabadsag utca 117 Forbes House, Halkin Street, 140 00 Prague – Czech Republic 2040 Budaörs – Hungary LONDON, SW1X 7DS Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 Customer Complaints Service, General Motors Danmark General Motors India Scottish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion, Jaegersborg Alle 4 Sixth Floor, Tower A (S.M .T.A.), 2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark Global Business Park 3 Palmerston Place, Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00 Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana – India The National Conciliation Service, Customer Ca re Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 Retail Motor Industry Federation, Griffin House, Osborne Road General Motors Ireland Ltd. 9 North Street, Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road RUBGY, CV21 2AB Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d: General Motors Finland Oy Te l. 00 353 1-216 10 00 The Service Departments of Adam Opel Pajuniityntie 5 General Motors Italia Srl GmbH and General Motors branches 00320 Helsinki – Finland Piazzale dell’Industria 40 everyw here will provide information and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 00144 Rome – Italy assistance: General Motors France Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 In Luxembourg please contact the 1 – 9, avenue du Marais General Motors Nederland B.V. General Motors Service Department in Angle Qua i de Bezons Lage Mosten 49 – 63 Antwerp – Belgium 95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France 4822 NK Breda – Netherlands Telephone: 00 32-34 50 63 29 Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 General Motors Austria GmbH ADAM OPE L Gm bH General Motors Norge AS Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59 Bahnhofsplatz 1 Kjeller-Vest 6 1220 Vienna – Austria 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany 2027 Kjeller – Norway Tel. 00 43-1-2 88 77 444 or Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Wołoska 5 06-675 Warsaw – Poland Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00 270 Service, maintenance

General Motors Portugal data is continually gathered and is used to Quinta da Fonte calculate the remaining distance until the Edificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2 next service. 2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal The remaining distance can be seen in the Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 odometer display when the ignition is off: General Motors Southeast Europe Press the reset button next to the trip org. zložka odometer. InSP and the remaining distance Apollo Business Centre will be displayed. Mlynské Nivy 45 If the remaining distance is less than 821 09 Bratislava - Slovakia 1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 with a remaining distance of 600 miles General Motors España S.L. (1000 km) when the ignition is switched on. Paseo de la Castellana, 91 InSP is displayed for several seconds if the 28046 Madrid – Spain remaining distance is less than 300 miles Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 Inspection system (500 km). Have service work that is due In order to guarantee economical and safe carried out within one week or 300 miles General Motors Norden AB (500 km ). Have this work carried out by a Årstaängvägen 17 vehicle operation and to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is of vital Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to 100 73 Stockholm – Sweden avoid invalidation of warranty claims. Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 importance that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals. Further information on maintenance and General Motors Suisse S.A. the inspection system can be found in the Stelzenstraße 4 For vehicles with strict engine oil change and service intervals, before servicing is Service Booklet, found in the glove 8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland compartment. Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 due the disp la y InS P appears on the odometer display after the ignition has Have maintenance work – and repair work General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti. been switched on and off: Have your next on the body and the eq uipm ent – carried Kemalpasa yolu üzeri service carried out by a workshop within out professionally by a workshop. We 35861 Torbali / Izmir – Turkey on e we ek or 30 0 miles (5 00 km ). recommend using your Vauxhall Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 The service interval display takes account Authorised Repairer, who has excellent In Albania, Bosnia-H erzegovina, of off-the-road periods during which the knowledge of Vauxhall vehicles and has Bulga ria, Croatia, Estonia, La tvia , battery is disconnected. the necessary special tools and up-to-date Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania, Service Instructions from Vauxhall. It is For vehicles with flexible oil change and Serbia-Montenegro and Slovenia particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall service intervals, the length of these please contact the Authorised Repairer during the warranty intervals is based on several parameters General Motors Service Department in period in order to prevent loss of warranty. stemming from usage. Budaörs – Hungary Further information can be found in the Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 For this reason, various engine-specific Service Booklet. Service, maintenance 271

Separ ate anti-cor rosion service Have this work carried out according to the intervals specified in the Service Booklet. Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories We recommend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts approved expressly for your vehicle type. These parts have undergone special tests to establish their reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we cannot assess or guarantee these attributes for other products, ev en if they have been granted A note on safety Never carry out any repairs or adjustment approval by the relevant authorities or in To avoid injury from moving parts and and maintenance work on the vehicle some other form. cables conducting ignition voltage, only yourself. This especially applies to the carry out engine compartment checks engine, chassis and safety parts. You may "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" unwittingly infringe the provisions of the and conversion parts approved by (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off. law and, by not performing the work Vauxhall can be obtained from your properly, endanger yourself and other Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can road users. provide expert advice on permitted 9 Warning technical changes and ensure correct The cooling fan is controlled by a Checking and topping u p fluids installation. thermoswitch and ca n therefore start To aid identification, the caps used when unexpectedly even if the ignition is topping up engine oil, coolant and wash switched off. Risk of injury. fluid as well as the oil dipstick handle may be coloured yellow. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. 272 Service, maintenance

Engine oil In vehicles with engine oil level Engine oil level check, topp ing up engine Information on engine oils is found in the monitoring 3 , the engine oil level is oil Service Booklet. monitored automatically - see page 103. The illustrations on this page show It is advisable to check the oil level before examples of the checks for various petrol Engine oil level and consum ption setting out on long journeys. and diesel engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next Ev ery engine consumes engine oil for page shows the checks for engine tec hnical reasons. The engine oil 9 Warning Z30DT1). consumption cannot be assessed until a The oil level must be checked with the fairly long distance has been driven, and Important: It is the owner’s responsibility may be above the specified value when the vehicle on a level surface and w ith the to maintain the correct level of an engine (which must be at operating vehicle is first being driven (run-in period). appropriate quality oil in the engine. Frequent driving at high revs increases temperature) switched off. Wait at least engine oil consumption. 5 minutes before chec king the level to allow the normal engine oil accumulation 9 Warning in the engine to drain into the oil pan.

Do not allow the engine oil to drop below the minimum level.

1) Sales designation – see page 284, 285. Service, maintenance 273

To check the engine oil level, insert wiped Top up with the same brand of engine oil Engine oil change, oil filter chang e oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will that was used during the previous oil Change oil at a workshop according to the go. Top engine oil up if the level has change, following the instructions in the service interval shown on the display. dropped into the range of the top-up mark Service Booklet. We recommend that you use genuine MIN. To close, position the cap and screw it into engine oil filters. The engine oil level must not exceed the place. 9 Warnin g upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess Capacities – see page 308. engine oil must be drained off or extracted. If the engine oil level is above the MAX Waste engine oil cannot be disposed of mark there is a risk of damage to the with domestic refuse. Observe the legal engine or the catalytic converter. requirements for disposal of old oil and The amount filled must be between filters to protect the environment and your health. the MIN and MAX marks – see page 308. 274 Service, maintenance

Diesel fuel filter Coo lant On each engine oil change, have the fuel The glycol-based coolant provides filter checked for any water residue by a excellent corrosion protection for the workshop. heating and cooling systems as well For engines1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and as anti-freeze protection down to approx. Z 19 DTH, control indicator A illuminates -28 °C. It remains in the cooling system if there is water in the diesel fuel filter. throughout the year and need not be changed. Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals if the v ehicle is subjected to extrem e Use of certain anti-freezes can lead to operating conditions such as high humidity engine dam age. We therefore rec om mend (primarily in coastal areas), extremely high that you use only approved anti-freezes. or low outside temperatures and substantially varying daytime and night- 9 Warning time temperatures. Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must Anti-freeze and corrosion protection therefore be kept in the original container Before the start of winter, have a workshop and out of the reach of children. check the anti-freeze protection. The anti- freeze level must guarantee protection down to approx. -28 °C. Insufficient anti- freeze will reduce the frost protection level and the corrosion protection. If necessary add anti-freeze. If coolant loss is topped up with water, have concentration checked and add anti- freeze if necessary.

1) Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285. Service, maintenance 275

When the engine is at op erating temperature, coolant level rises. It falls again when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT/COLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark. Top up anti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is available, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailable, distilled water can be used. After filling with tap water or distilled water, measure the anti-freeze concentration and add anti-freeze if required. Have a workshop establish the cause of the coolant loss. Coola nt level For V6 petrol and diesel engines, the Hardly any losses occur since the cooling exp ansion tank must be opened in ord er to Too low a coolant level can cause engine system is sealed and it is thus rarely check coolant level. When the cooling damage. necessary to top up the coolant. sy ste m is cold, the coolant should be up to To close, position the cap and screw it into 4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When the COLD mark on the filler opening. place. the cooling system is cold, the coolant level 9 Warning 6 in the expansion tank should be slightly above the KALT/C OLD mark. Coolant level Allow engine to cool down before can be read off from the outside of the expansion tank. removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler cap carefully so that pressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding. 276 Service, maintenance

Coola nt temperature Use of certain brake fluids can lead to If the temperature gauge enters the right- damage or reduced braking effect. We hand (warning) zone or control indicator W therefore recommend that you use only illuminates, check the coolant level high performance approved brake fluid. immediately. Extrem e cleanliness is needed when z Coolant level too low: topping up, since contamination in the Top up coolant, noting the instructions brake fluid can cause brake system given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion malfunctions. protection" and "Coolant level". Have After correcting the brake fluid level, have the cause of the coolant loss rectified by a workshop eliminate the cause of the a workshop. brake fluid loss. z Coolant level OK: Have the cause of the elevated coolant temperature rectified. Contact a workshop. Brake fluid Brake fluid level 9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do not allow it to come into contact with eyes, skin, fab ric or painted surfaces. Direct contact could cause injury and damage.

The fluid level in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor lower than the MIN mark. Service, maintenance 277

Brake fluid change Windscreen wiper If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass, Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs Clear vision is essential for safe driving. we recomm end that it be released with the water. If the brakes become hot, such as aid of De-icer Spray. Perform regular checks on the windscreen when driving on long downhill stretches, Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with vapour bubbles can occur in the w ater, wiper and headlight wash system 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen which can have an extremely adverse Wash Solvent. effect on braking power (depending on the recommend wiper blade replacement at proportion of water). least once a year. Wiper blades whose lips have become hardened, cracked or covered with silicone The fluid change intervals specified in the If the windscreen is dirty, operate the windscreen wash system before switching must be replaced. This may be necessary Service Booklet must therefore be as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt observed. on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automatic operation with the rain or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning 9 Warning se nsor 3. This will avoid w iper blade wear. agents. Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or Switch off the windscreen wiper or Have the brake fluid changed by a set the wiper to automatic operation with automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car workshop. Observe the legal the rain sensor 3 if the w indscreen is iced washes - see pages 11, 264. requirements for disposal of brake fluid up as this could damage the wiper blades Windscreen w ip er blad e m aintenanc e - to protect the environment and your or the wipe r sy ste m. see page 266. he alth. 6 278 Service, maintenance

To ensure proper operation of the rain Service setting for front windscreen wiper Wiper blades on the windscreen sensor 3, the se nsor a re a must be free from (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front Activating service position - see preceding dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash wiper blades). column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release system must also be operated at regular Within 8 se conds of switching off the lever and detach the wiper blade. intervals and the sensor area must be engine but with the key in the starter de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor can be switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk identified by the sensor area near the top downwards. Release the stalk as soon as of the windscreen. the wiper blades are vertical. Service, maintenance 279

Fill only with clean water to prevent the The windscreen wash system and nozzles from clogging. To improve headlight wash system will not freeze in cleaning efficiency, w e recommend that winter: you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. Frost protection Mixture ratio of down to Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent to Water - 5 °C 1 : 3 - 10 °C 1 : 2 - 20 °C 1 : 1 - 30 °C 2 : 1

Windscreen and headlight wash When closing the reservoir, press the lid systems 3 firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way The filler neck of the windscreen wash round. system and headlight wash system fluid container 3 is at the front left of the engine compartment next to the battery. The fluid level in the reservoir can be read off from 1 the level indicator. Do not fill above /1. Capacities – see page 308. 280 Service, maintenance

Laying up the vehicle for more than Protecting electronic components 4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, In order to prev ent faults in elec tronic which may reduce the service life of the components in the electrical system, never battery. Disconnect battery from on-board connect or disconnect battery with engine power supply by detaching negative running or ignition switched on. Never start terminal. engine with battery disconnected, e.g. The Vauxhall alarm system 3 sire n must be when starting using jump leads. deactivated as follows: switch the ignition To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s make any modifications to the electrical battery within 15 seconds. system, e.g. connecting additional Ensure that ignition is switched off before consumers or tampering with electronic connecting battery. Then perform the control units (chip tuning). following actions: 9 Warnin g Battery z Setting date and time in the information display – see pages 110, 113, 118. The b attery is m aintenanc e-free. Electronic ignition systems generate very z Activate window and sunroof high voltages. Do not touch the ignition 9 Warning electronics 3 if necessary – system; high voltage can be fatal. see pages 47, 49. Have the battery changed by a In order to prevent the battery from workshop. Observe the legal discharging, some consume rs such as the requirements for disposal of old batteries courtesy light automatically switch off to protect the environment and your after approx. 20 minutes. he alth. Disconnecting/connecting the battery from/to the electrical system Retro-fitting of electrical or electronic Disconnect battery from vehicle power accessories can discharge or add extra supply before charging: disconnect load to the battery. Take advice on the negative cable first, then the positive technical possibilities, e.g. use of a more cable. powerful battery. The polarity of the battery, i.e. the positive and negative terminal connections, must not be switched. Always connect the positive cable first, then the negative cable. Service, maintenance 281

Vehicle decommissioning Vehicle storag e Vehicle recommissioning Observe national regulations. z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place. Observe national regulations. With manual transmission or If the vehicle is to be parked for several Easytronic 3 , engage 1st or reverse Perform the following work before months, to avoid damage have the gear. With automatic transmission 3, recommissioning the vehicle: following work performed by a workshop. selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like z Connect battery – see page 280. z to prevent the vehicle from rolling. Wash and preserve the vehicle – z Check tyre pressure and correct if seepage264. z Do not apply handbrake. necessary – see page 299. z Check corrosion protection in engine z Disconnect battery by disengaging z Fill up w indscreen wash system and compartment and on underbody and negative terminal from vehicle electrical headlight wash system 3 – repair if necessary. system – see page 280. see page 279. z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on z Check engine oil level – see page 272. bonnet and doors. z Check the coolant level; top up with anti- z Change engine oil – see page 273. freeze if necessary – see page 275. z Check anti-freeze and corrosion z Fit the number plate if necessary. protection – see page 274. z Check the coolant level, top up with anti- freeze if necessary – see page 275. z Empty windsc re en w ash system and headlight wash system 3 . z Increase tyre pressure to value specified for full load – see page 299. 282 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle documents, identification plate...... 282 Vehicle documents, Information on identification plate: Vehicle identification data...... 283 identification plate 1 Manufacturer Coolant, bra ke fluid, oils ...... 283 The technical data is determined in 2 Type approval number Engine data...... 284 accordance with European Community 3 Vehicle I dentification Number Performance...... 286 standards. We reserve the right to make 4 Gross Vehicle Weight rating modifications. Specifications in the vehicle Fuel consumption, CO emissions ...... 5 Permissib le Gross Train W eig ht 2 288 documents always have priority over those Weights, pay loa d and roof load ...... 293 given in this manual. 6 Maximum permissible front axle load Tyres ...... 299 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load Electrical system ...... 307 The identification plate is affixed to the 8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific front right door frame. Ca pacities ...... 308 data Dimensions...... 310 Technical data 283

In other model variants, the identification Coolant, brake fluid, oils plate may also be affixed to the instrument Only use approved fluids. panel. Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious Engine code and engine number: stamped damage to the vehicle. on left-hand side of engine on crankcase. Engine oils Information on engine oils is found in the Service Booklet.

Vehicle identification data The Vehicle Identification Number is stamped on the identification plate and beneath a cover on the floor of the vehicle between the front door and driver’s seat. 284 Technical data

Engine data Sales designation 1.8 1. 8 2.0 Turbo 2.2 2.2 DIRECT 2.8 V6 Engine identifier code Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4 6 Piston displacement (cm3) 1796 1796 1998 2198 2198 2792 Engine power (kW) 90 103 129 108 114 169 at rpm 6000 6300 5500 5600 5600 5500 Torque (Nm) 167 175 265 203 220 330 at rpm 3800 3800 2500 to 3800 4000 3800 1800 to 4500

Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Octane requirement (RON)1) unle aded 95 95 95 95 95 5) 95 or un le aded 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) or un le aded 91 2)3 ) 91 2)3) 91 2)4 ) 91 2) 4) –6) 91 2)3 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6500 6500 6200 6500 6500 6700 Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 2) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 3) Slight reduction in engine ou tput and to rque if 91 RON is used. 4) If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in m ountaino us terrain with a caravan/trailer load or high payload. 5) The use of fuel that is at least 95 RON is prescribed. 6) 91 octane fu el must not be used. Technical data 285

Engine data Sales designation 2.8 V6 VXR 1.9 CDTI 1. 9 CDTI 1. 9 CDTI 3. 0 C DTI Engine identifier code Z 28 NET Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Number of cylinders664446 Piston displacement (cm3) 2792 2792 1910 1910 1910 2958 Engine power (kW) 184 206 74 88 110 135 at rpm 5500 5500 3500 3500 to 4000 4000 4000 Torque (Nm) 350 355 260 280 320 400 at rpm 1800 to 4500 1800 to 4500 1700 to 2500 2000 to 2750 2000 to 2750 1900 to 2700

Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Octane requirement (RON)1) unle aded 95 95 4) – – – – or un le aded 98 2) 98 2) – – – – or un le aded 91 2)3 ) –5) – – – – Cetane requirement (CN)1) – – 49 (D)6) 49 (D) 4) 49 (D) 4) 49 (D)4) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6700 6700 5100 5100 5100 5000 Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 2) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 3) Slight reduction in engine ou tput and to rque if 91 RON is used. 4) Slight reduction in engine ou tput and to rque if 95 RON is used. 5) 91 octane fu el must not be used. 6) A lo wer va l ue is pos sib l e wi th w i nter fu els. 286 Technical data

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Saloon / Hatch Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NE T Z 22 SE Z 22 Y H Z 28 N EL Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 126/203 130/210 – 134/216 135/218 155/250 Sports transmission 127/205 130/210 143/230 – 135/218 – Easytronic – 129/207 – – – – Automatic transmission – – – 130/210 130/210 155/250

Engine1) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 155/2503) 155/2503) 116/186 124/200 135/217 143/230 Sports transmission – – – – – – Easytronic – – – – – – Automatic transmission 155/2503) 155/2503) – – 130/210 140/226

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximu m speed of th e vehicle. 3) The maximum speed is limited electronically. Technical data 287

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Esta te Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Maximum speed2) Manual transmission – 126/203 – 130/210 152/245 Sports transmission 124/199 130/209 139/224 130/210 – Easytronic – 128/207 – – – Automatic transmission – – – 129/208 152/245

Engine1) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 155/2503) 155/2503) 113/182 121/195 130/210 140/225 Sports transmission – – – – – – Easytronic – – – – – – Automatic transmission 155/2503) 155/2503) – – 129/208 137/221

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximu m speed of th e vehicle. 3) The maximum speed is limited electronically. 288 Technical data

The directive is oriented to actual driving The figures given must not be taken as a Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions practices: Urban driving is rated at guarantee for the actual fuel consumption Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed 1 by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the approx. /3 and extra-urban driving with of a particular vehicle. 2 measurement of fuel consumption approx. /3 (urban and extra-urban All values are based on the EU base model since 1996. consumption). Cold starts and acceleration with standard equipment. phases are also taken into consideration. The calculation of fuel consumption as The specification of CO emission is also a 2 specified by directive 2004/3/EC takes constituent of the directive. account of the vehicle’s kerbweight, ascertained in accordance with these regulations. Optional extras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2 emission levels than those quoted. To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282 by num ber of litres/100 km. S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent – see page 186. Technical data 289

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.4/10.7/–/– 10.1/ 9. 9/ 9.7/– –/12.5/–/– – /11. 4/–/13.3 10.3/10.3/–/11.3 extra-urban 5.5/ 5.8/–/– 5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/– –/ 6.3/–/– – / 6.2/–/ 6.5 6. 0/ 5.9/– / 6.1 total 7.3/ 7.6/–/– 7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/– –/ 8.6/–/– – / 8.1/–/ 9.0 7. 6/ 7.5/– / 8.0 CO 2 175/ 182/–/– 173/173/168/– –/ 206/–/– – / 194/–/ 216 182/ 180/–/ 192 Engine1) Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 15.4/–/–/17.1 15.4/–/–/17.1 7.4/–/–/– 7.4/–/–/– 7.4/–/–/ 9.4 9.8/–/–/10.2 extra-urban 7. 3/–/–/ 7. 3 7.3/–/–/ 7.3 4.7/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/ 5.3 5.2/–/–/ 5.3 total 10.3/–/–/10.9 10.3/–/–/10.9 5.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/ 6.8 6.9/–/–/ 7.1 CO 2 247/–/–/ 262 247/–/–/ 262 154/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 154/–/–/184 186/–/–/ 192

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.5/10.8/–/– 10.2/10.0/ 9.8/– –/12.6/–/– – /11. 5/–/13.4 10.4/10.4/–/11.4 extra-urban 5.6/ 5.9/–/– 5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/– –/ 6.4/–/– – / 6.3/–/ 6.6 6. 1/ 6.0/– / 6.2 total 7.4/ 7.7/–/– 7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/– –/ 8.7/–/– – / 8.2/–/ 9.1 7. 7/ 7.6/– / 8.1 CO 2 178/ 185/–/– 175/ 175/170/– –/209/–/– – / 197/–/ 218 185/ 182/–/194 Engine1) Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 15.5/–/–/17.2 15.5/–/–/17.2 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/ 9.5 9.9/–/–/10.3 extra-urban 7. 4/–/–/ 7. 4 7.4/–/–/ 7.4 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/ 5.4 5.3/–/–/ 5.4 total 10.4/–/–/11.0 10.4/–/–/11.0 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/ 6.9 7.0/–/–/ 7.2 CO 2 250/–/–/264 250/–/–/264 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/186 189/–/–/ 194

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 290 Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.4/10.7/–/– 10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/– –/12.5/– /– – /11.4/–/13.3 extra-urban 5.5/ 5.8/–/– 5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/– –/ 6.3/–/– – / 6. 2/–/ 6.5 total 7.3/ 7.6/–/– 7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/– –/ 8.6/–/– – / 8. 1/–/ 9.0 CO 2 175/ 182/–/– 173/173/168/– –/ 206/–/– – / 194/–/ 216 Engine1) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.3/10.3/–/11.3 15.4/–/–/17.1 15.4/–/– /17. 1 15.4/–/–/2) extra-urban 6.0/ 5.9/–/ 6.1 7.3/–/–/ 7.3 7.3/–/–/ 7.3 7. 3/–/–/ 2) total 7.6/ 7.5/–/ 8.0 10.3/–/–/10.9 10.3/–/– /10. 9 10.3/–/–/2) 2) CO 2 182/ 180/–/ 192 247/–/–/ 262 247/–/–/262 247/–/–/ Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 7.4/–/–/– 7.4/–/–/– 7.4/–/–/ 9.5 9.8/–/–/10.2 extra-urban 4.7/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/– 4.7/–/–/ 5.4 5.2/–/– / 5. 3 total 5.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/– 5.7/–/–/ 6.9 6.9/–/– / 7. 1 CO 2 154/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 154/–/–/186 186/–/–/ 192

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 2) Values not available at time of printing. Technical data 291

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.5/10.8/–/– 10.2/10.0/ 9.8/– –/12.6/–/– – /11.5/–/13.4 extra-urban 5. 6/ 5.9/–/– 5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/– –/ 6.4/–/– – / 6.3/–/ 6.6 total 7. 4/ 7.7/–/– 7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/– –/ 8.7/–/– – / 8.2/–/ 9.1 CO 2 178/ 185/–/– 175/ 175/170/– –/ 209/–/– – / 197/–/ 218 Engine1) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 10.4/10.4/–/11.4 15.5/–/–/17.2 15.5/– /–/17.2 15.4/–/–/2) extra-urban 6.1/ 6.0/–/ 6.2 7.4/–/– / 7. 4 7.4/–/–/ 7.4 7.3/–/–/2) total 7.7/ 7.6/–/ 8.1 10.4/–/–/11.0 10.4/– /–/11.0 10.3/–/–/2) 2) CO 2 185/ 182/–/ 194 250/–/–/ 264 250/–/–/ 264 247/–/–/ Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/ 9.6 9.9/–/–/10.3 extra-urban 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/ 5.5 5.3/–/–/ 5.4 total 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/ 7.0 7.0/–/–/ 7.2 CO 2 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/189 189/–/–/ 194

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 2) Values not available at time of printing. 292 Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban –/11.0/–/– 10.3/10.4/10.0/– –/12.7/–/– 10.6/10.6/–/11.5 15.5/–/– /17. 4 extra-urban –/ 6.1/–/– 5.9/ 6.1/ 5.7/– –/ 6.5/–/– 6. 3/ 6.2/– / 6.3 7.4/–/–/ 7.6 total –/ 7.9/–/– 7.5/ 7.7/ 7.3/– –/ 8.8/–/– 7. 9/ 7.8/– / 8. 2 10.4/–/– /11. 2 CO 2 –/ 190/–/– 180/ 185/ 175/– –/ 211/–/– 190/ 187/–/ 197 250/–/–/269 Engine1) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 15.5/–/–/17.4 15.5/–/–/2) 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/– 7.5/–/–/ 9.6 9.8/–/–/10.3 extra-urban 7. 4/–/–/ 7. 6 7. 4/–/–/2) 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/– 4.8/–/–/ 5.5 5.2/–/–/ 5.4 total 10.4/–/–/11.2 10.4/–/–/2) 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/– 5.8/–/–/ 7.0 6.9/–/–/ 7.2 2) CO 2 250/–/–/ 269 250/–/–/ 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 157/–/–/189 186/–/–/ 194

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban –/11.1/–/– 10.4/10.5/10.1/– –/12.8/–/– 10.7/10.7/–/11.6 15.6/–/– /17. 5 extra-urban –/ 6.2/–/– 6.0/ 6.2/ 5.8/– –/ 6.6/–/– 6. 4/ 6.3/– / 6.4 7.5/–/–/ 7.7 total –/ 8.0/–/– 7.6/ 7.8/ 7.4/– –/ 8.9/–/– 8. 0/ 7.9/– / 8. 3 10.5/–/– /11. 3 CO 2 –/ 192/–/– 182/ 187/ 178/– –/ 214/–/– 192/ 190/–/ 199 252/–/–/271 Engine1) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban 15.6/–/–/17.5 15.5/–/–/2) 7.6/–/–/– 7.6/–/–/– 7.6/–/–/ 9.7 9.9/–/–/10.4 extra-urban 7. 5/–/–/ 7. 7 7. 4/–/–/2) 4.9/–/–/– 4.9/–/–/– 4.9/–/–/ 5.6 5.3/–/–/ 5.5 total 10.5/–/–/11.3 10.4/–/–/2) 5.9/–/–/– 5.9/–/–/– 5.9/–/–/ 7.1 7.0/–/–/ 7.3 2) CO 2 252/–/–/ 271 250/–/–/ 159/–/–/– 159/–/–/– 159/–/–/192 189/–/–/ 197

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 2) Values not available at time of printing. Technical data 293

Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front and rear axle Roof load The p ayload is the difference between the loa ds must not e xce ed the perm issible The permissible roof load is 90 kg, and permitted Gross Vehicle Weight (see Gross Vehicle Weight. For example, if the 100 kg for Estate with roof railing 3 . The identification plate on page 282) and the front axle is bearing its maximum roof load is the combined weight of the EC kerbweig ht. permissible load, the rear axle can only roof rack and the load. bear a load that is equal to the Gross Driving hints – see page 184. To calculate the kerbweight, enter the data Ve hicle W eight m inus the front axle load. for your vehicle below: Roof rack – see page 218. z Kerb weight from When the caravan/trailer is coupled and Table 1, pages 294 to the towing vehicle fully loaded (including 296 + ...... kg all occupants), the permissible rear axle loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle z Additional weight of documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If equipment versions the permissible rear axle load is exceeded, from Table 2, page 297 + ...... kg a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) z Weight of heavy applies. If national regulations specify a accessories from lower maximum speed for vehicles towing Ta ble 3, p age 298 + ...... kg a caravan/trailer, this must be observed. Total = ...... kg See the identification plate or v ehicle is the EC kerbweight. documents for permissible axle loads. Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, which means that the payload will also change slightly. Pay attention to weight ranges in vehicle documents and on identification plate. 294 Technical data

Weights (kg): Ta ble 1, Kerbweig ht1) , Saloon Model Engine2) 4-door Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Vectra with Z 18 XE 1395 – – Elec tronic Climate Control 3 Z 18 XER 1395 1395 – Z 20 NET 1505 – – Z 22 SE 1460 – 1490 Z 22 YH 1460 – 1490 Z 28 NEL 1565 – 1590 Z 28 NET 1565 – 1590 Z 19 DTL 1505 – – Z 19 DT 1505 – – Z 19 DTH 1503 – 1523 Z 30 DT 1635 – 1660

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical data 295

Weights (kg): Table 1, Kerbweight1), H atch Model Engine2) 5-door Manua l transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Vectra with Z 18 XE 1393 – – Electronic Clim ate Control 3 Z 18 XER 1393 1393 – Z 20 NET 1503 – – Z 22 SE 1475 – 1505 Z 22 YH 1475 – 1505

Z 28 NEL 1580 – 1605 Z 28 NET 1580 – 1605 Z 19 DTL 1503 – – Z 19 DT 1503 – – Z 19 DTH 1523 – 1548 Z 30 DT 1650 – 1675

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285 . 296 Technical data

Weights (kg): Ta ble 1, Kerbweig ht1) , Estate Model Engine2) Estate Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Vectra with Z 18 XE 1475 – – Elec tronic Climate Control 3 Z 18 XER 1475 1475 – Z 20 NET 1570 – – Z 22 YH 1523 – 1553 Z 28 NEL 1613 – 1638 Z 28 NET 1613 – 1638 Z 19 DTL 1585 – – Z 19 DT 1585 – – Z 19 DTH 1600 – 1613 Z 30 DT 1685 – 1710

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical data 297

Weights (kg): Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Saloon / Hatch Engine1) Z 18 XE, Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 18 XER Life 16 16 16 16 16 16 Exclusiv 32 32 32 32 32 32 Design/Elite 313131313131 SRi 282828282828

Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Life 16 16 16 6 Ex clusiv 32 32 32 22 Design/Elite 31 31 31 21 SRi 28 28 28 26

Estate Engine1) Z 18 XE, Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Z 18 XER Life555555553 Exclusiv 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 20 Design/Elite272727272727272725 SRi232323232323232326

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 298 Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories Saloon / Hatch Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment

W eight 17 23

Estate Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment

W eight 18 33 Technical data 299

Tyres If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel Depending on the model variant, the spare Not all tyres available on the market may still be fitted w ith a summer tyre. Use wheel is designed to be an emergency currently meet the structural requirem ents. of the spare wheel may alter vehicle wheel 3: Using a spare wheel may change We recommend that you consult a handling. Obtain a replacement for the the vehicle ’s ha nd ling. Repla ce de fective Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have tyres as quickly as possible, balance wheel suitable tyre makes. the wheel balanced and fitted to the and fit to vehicle. vehicle. These ty res have und ergone special tests The spare wheel may be fitted with a 1) to establish their reliability, safety and Further information – see page 216. smaller tyre and a smaller rim than the wheels fitted to the vehicle: Using the spare specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. 3 Tyre chains wheel may change the vehicle’s handling. Des pite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we Ty re c hains may be used on the front 2) are unable to assess these attributes for wheels only. Tyre pressure in psi/bar other tyres, ev en if they hav e been gra nted We recommend the use of fine-link tyre The specified tyre pressures are valid for approval by the relevant authorities or in cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure some other form. chains which amount to max 10 mm on the tread and tyre inner wall with chain lock resulting from extensive driving must not Further information – see page 211. be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on Tyre chains are not permitted on tyre sizes the following pages apply to both summer 3 Winter tyres 115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18, and w inter tyres. Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and 235/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19. 235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre tyres. Further information – see page 217. pressure for full load - see tables on following pages. O nly the winter tyres sp ecified on page 306 Wheels may be used on vehicles factory-fitted with Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3 – see tables on the following pages. 235/35 R 19 tyres. Spare wheel 3 In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on On vehicles with alloy w heels 3 the spare 3 a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with wheel may have a steel rim. system there is an adapter in the valve designation 7x17, ET39 as well as tyres of cap key. Screw adapter to valve before size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter attaching tyre pressure gauge – tyres. see page 213. Further information – see pages 211 to 217.

1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a tempo ra ry sp are wh eel. 2) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 300 Technical data

(ctd.) Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in psi/bar load of up to ECO1) loaded with full load 3people up to 3 people Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, 195/65 R 15, 29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 Z 18 XER 205/55 R 16, 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 20 NET 205/55 R 163) 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3.0

215/55 R 16, 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 22 SE, 195/65 R 15, 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2.9 Z 22 YH 205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16, 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

all T 115/70 R 164) 61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4.2

1) To reduce fuel co nsum ption as much as po ssible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. 3) Only permitted as winter tyres. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. Technical data 301

(ctd.) Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure for full Tyre pressure in psi/bar lo ad o f u p t o load 3people

Engine1) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Z 28 NEL , 215/55 R 16 2) 35/2.4 35/2.4 38/2.6 45/3.1 Z 28 NET 215/50 R 17 2), 38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 225/45 R 17 2), 225/45 R 18 2) 215/55 R 16 3) 36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2

215/50 R 17 3), 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 225/45 R 17 3), 225/45 R 18 3) Ve ctra V XR 235/35 R 19, 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 235/40 R 18 225/45 R 17 4) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

all T 115/70 R 165) 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. 2) V er sio n wi t h ma nua l t ra nsm is sio n. 3) Version with automatic transmission. 4) Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels. 5) For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237. 302 Technical data

(ctd.) Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in psi/bar loa d of up to ECO1) loaded w ith full load 3people up to 3 people Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 19 DTL , 195/65 R 15, 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0 Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16 215/55 R 16, 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 19 DT 195/65 R 15, 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 205/55 R 16 215/55 R 16, 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 Z 30 DT 215/55 R 16, 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2

215/50 R 17, 38/2.6 35/2.4 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 225/45 R 18

225/45 R 17 39/2.7 35/2.4 – – 41/2.8 48/3. 3 all T 115/70 R 163) 61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4. 2

1) To reduce fuel co nsum ption as much as po ssible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. 3) For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237. Technical data 303

(ctd.) Estat e Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in psi/bar loa d of up to ECO1) loaded w ith full load 3people up to 3 people Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, 195/65 R 15, 29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 Z 18 XER 205/55 R 16, 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 20 NET 205/55 R 163) 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0

215/55 R 16, 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 22 YH, 195/65 R 153), 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 Z 22 SE 205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16, 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

all T 115/70 R 164) 61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4. 2

1) To reduce fuel co nsum ption as much as po ssible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. 3) Only permitted as winter tyres. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. 304 Technical data

(ctd.) Estat e Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure for full Tyre pressure in psi/bar lo ad o f u p t o load 3people

Engine1) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Z 28 NEL , 215/55 R 16 2) 36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2 Z 28 NET 215/50 R 17 2), 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 225/45 R 17 2), 225/45 R 18 2)

215/55 R 16 3) 38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 215/50 R 17 3), 39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4 225/45 R 18 3) 225/45 R 17 3) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

Ve ctra V XR 235/35 R 19, 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 235/40 R 18

225/45 R 17 4) 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 all T 115/70 R 165) 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

1) Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 . 2) V er sio n wi t h ma nua l t ra nsm is sio n. 3) Version with automatic transmission. 4) Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels. 5) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. Technical data 305

(ctd.) Estat e Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in psi/bar loa d of up to ECO1) loaded w ith full load 3people up to 3 people

Engine2) Tyres Front Front Rear Rear Front Rear Z 19 DTL , 195/65 R 15, 35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3. 0 Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16 215/55 R 16, 33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18

Z 19 DT 195/65 R 15, 33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2. 9 205/55 R 16 215/55 R 16, 32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 Z 30 DT 215/55 R 16 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2

215/50 R 17, 38/2.6 35/2.4 – – 39/2.7 46/3. 2 225/45 R 18

225/45 R 17 39/2.7 35/2.4 – – 41/2.8 48/3. 3 all T 115/70 R 163) 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

1) To reduce fuel co nsum ption as much as po ssible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5. 3) For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237. 306 Technical data

(ctd.) Saloon / Hatch, Esta te Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure for full Tyre pressure in psi/bar with 19-inch wheels lo ad o f u p t o load 3people

Engine1) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, 235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 Z 18 XER, 2) Z 22 SE, 215/55 R 16 , 33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0 2) Z 22 YH 225/45 R 17 , 205/50 R 17 2) Z 20 NET, 235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 Z 19 DTL , 2) Z 19 DTH 215/55 R 16 , 33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0 225/45 R 17 2)

205/50 R 17 2) 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3 Z 28 NEL , 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 Z 28 NET 215/55 R 16 2), 41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5 225/45 R 17 2)

205/50 R 17 2) 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 Z 30 DT 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

215/55 R 16 2), 39/2.7 36/2.5 42/2.9 49/3.4 225/45 R 17 2)

205/50 R 17 2) 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5 all T 115/70 R 163) 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

1) Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 . 2) Only permitted as winter tyres. 3) For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237. Technical data 307

Electrical system

Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 55 Ah / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3 Battery for remote control of central locking system CR 20 32 Battery for remote control of auxiliary heater/ventilation AAA LR 06 308 Technical data

Capacities (approx. litres) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL, Z28 NET Fuel tank (nominal content) Saloon / Hatch 61 61 61 61 61 61 Estate 60 60 60 60 60 60 Engine oil with filter change 4.25 4.5 6.0 4.75 5.0 6.0 between MIN and M AX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.75 1.0 1.0 Windscreen wash reservoir 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 with headlight wash system 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical data 309

Capacities (approx. litres) Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Fuel tank (nominal content) Saloon / Hatch 61 61 61 61 Estate 60 60 60 60 Engine oil with filter change 4.3 4.3 4.3 7.5 between MIN and M AX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Windscreen wash reservoir 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 with headlight wash system 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 310 Technical data

Dimensions (approx. mm) Saloon / Hatch Estate Saloon / Hatch VXR Estat e VXR Overall length 4611 4839 4642 4870 Overall width 1798 1798 1798 1798 Width with two exterior mirrors 2036 2036 2036 2036 Overall height1) 1460 1500 1460 1500 Length of luggage compartment floor 1047 1176 1047 1176 Luggage compartment width maximum 1396 1079 1396 1079 between the wheel arches 972 1060 972 1060 Height of luggage compartment 6142) 767 614 767 opening W hee lb ase 2700 2830 2700 2830 Turning circle diameter3) 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50

1) At kerbweight with driver. 2) 4-door Saloon 324 mm. 3) In me t re s. Technical data 311

Installation dimensions of ca ra va n/trailer towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3 , Saloon / Hatch All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 334 B 1061 C 492.5 D 486.5 E 218 F 495 G 492.5 H 201

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a workshop. 312 Technical data

Installation dimensions of ca ra va n/trailer towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 , Estate All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 396.5 B 157.5 C 386 D 74 E 630 F 590 G 491 H 486 I 480 J 379.5

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a workshop. Technical data 313 314 Index

Index A Anti-loc k Brake System (ABS)...... 210 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 38 Ac cessories...... 77, 234 Anti-theft locking system ...... 30 Ac cessory socket ...... 60, 93 Anti-theft protection ...... 16 Ad aptive brake light ...... 208 Aquaplaning...... 215 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 132, 133 Armrest ...... 57 Bulb replacem ent ...... 257 Ashtray...... 94, 135 Driving abroad ...... 136 Automatic air recircula tion m od e...... 161 Adjusting the incline Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror.... 44 Seats ...... 51 Automatic level control system ...... 204 Air conditioning system ...... 140 Automatic transm ission...... 14 Air intak e...... 166 Automatic mode ...... 177 Air outlet ...... 166 Driving programmes ...... 178 Air qua lity sensor ...... 157 Fault ...... 182 Air recirculation system ...... 148, 153, 161 Interruption of p ow er supply...... 183 Air vents ...... 142 Kickd ow n...... 180 Airba gs...... 81 Manual mode ...... 178 Ala rm ...... 40 Selector lev er...... 14, 177, 178 Ala rm system ...... 38 Selector lev er lock ...... 177 Alterna tor ...... 99 Winter programme...... 180 Antenna ...... 137 Automatic wiping ...... 12, 127 Anti-corrosion service...... 271 Auxiliary heating...... 163 Anti-freeze ...... 274 Program ming...... 164 Anti-freeze protection...... 274, 279 Remote control ...... 165 Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ...... 188 Octane number...... 284, 285 Index 315

B C Control indicators...... 10, 98 Adaptive Forward Lighting ...... 104, 133 Battery ...... 185, 280, 307 Capacities ...... 308 Airb ag ...... 86 Interruption of Car Pass ...... 26 Anti-lock Bra ke System (ABS)...... 210 power supply...... 47, 175, 183 Carava n/trailer towing ...... 184 Belt tensioners ...... 74 Battery discharge p rotection...... 136 Care ...... 264 Brake system...... 209 Before sta rting-off ...... 15, 16, 126 Catalytic conv erter ...... 195, 229 Engine elec tronics...... 192 Belt force limiters ...... 73 CDC (Continuous Da mping Control).... 198 Electronic Stability Programme ...... 196 Belt tensioners...... 73 Central lock ing system ...... 30 Exhaust...... 192 Bleeding, d iesel fuel system...... 228 Centre console lighting ...... 135 IDS+ ...... 199 Board Information Disp la y ...... 108 Changing the battery Immobiliser...... 27 Bonnet ...... 228 Remote c ontrol ...... 29, 165, 307 Parking distance sensors ... 202 133, 203 Boot, see Luggage compartment .... 34, 65 Changing tyre/wheel typ e ...... 211 Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 207 Brake assist ...... 208 Changing wheels ...... 238 Cool box...... 61 Brake light ...... 208 Chassis num ber, Coolant ...... 274 Brake system ...... 99 see Vehic le Id entific ation N umber ..... 283 Coolant level ...... 275 Brakes Check control ...... 20, 124 Coolant tempera ture display...... 106 ABS...... 210 Child restraint system...... 77 Cooled glove compartm ent ...... 143 Bra ke assist ...... 208 Child safety lock s...... 41, 46 Cooling ...... 149, 154 Bra ke fluid ...... 276 Cigarette lighter ...... 93, 135 Correcting time...... 112, 118 Bra ke lig hts...... 258 Climate control ...... 140 Coupling socket load ...... 224 Bra ke servo unit ...... 184 Climate control system ...... 156 Courtesy light ...... 134 Footbrake ...... 208 Clutch operation...... 185 Courtesy lights Handbrake ...... 209 CO 2 emissions ...... 287, 288 Bulb replacement ...... 262 Bulb replacem ent ...... 252 Cold start ...... 185 Cruise control...... 200 Bulbs ...... 252 Colour Information Display ...... 108 Curtain airbag s ...... 85 Continuous Damping Control (CDC).... 198 Curv e lighting (AFL) ...... 22, 132 Contra st...... 119 316 Index

D E Env ironmental protection ...... 264, 273 ESP (Electronic Stability Programme) .. 196 Dashb oa rd, see Instrument panel ...... 6 Easytronic ...... 14, 168 Exhaust c ontrol indicator ...... 192 Data ...... 26, 282 Driving programm es ...... 171 Exhaust g ases...... 193 Date ...... 110, 113 Interruption of power supply ...... 175 Exhaust system ...... 193 Daytime running lig hts ...... 128 Kic kdown ...... 172 Exterior mirrors ...... 6, 43, 143 Dec om missioning ...... 281 Selector lever...... 14 Demisting and defrosting Starting-off...... 170 Windows ...... 147 Winter programm e...... 172 With climate control system...... 159 Economical driving ...... 186 With air conditioning sy stem .... 150, 155 Elec tric seat adjustment...... 52 Diesel fuel filter ...... 274 Elec tric sunroof ...... 47 Diesel fuel system ...... 228, 274 Elec tric windows ...... 45 Diesel particle filter...... 102, 143, 185, 194 Elec trica l system ...... 246, 280, 307 Dimensions...... 310 Electro-hydraulic power-assisted Dipped beam ...... 7 steering...... 10, 103, 184 Bulb replacement...... 253, 255 Elec tronic com ponents ...... 280 Display...... 107, 108 Electronic immobiliser ...... 27 Display mode ...... 120 Electronic Stability Programme ...... 196 Door locks...... 26, 266 Engine c od e ...... 283, 284, 285 Doors ...... 100 Engine c ontrol indicator...... 192 Door-to-door lighting ...... 133 Engine oil ...... 272 Drink holders ...... 97 Engine oil c hange ...... 273 Driver’s seat with climate control ...... 144 Engine oil level and consumption 103, 272 Driving abroad ...... 188, 269 Engine oil filter ...... 273 Headlights ...... 136 Engine oil p ressure ...... 98 Toll system ...... 138 Engine speed ...... 185 Driving hints ...... 184 Engine w ash ...... 266 Index 317

F G H Fan...... 145, 152, 271 Gears ...... 14 Halogen headlight system ...... 253 Filling station Generator, see Alternator ...... 99 Bulb replacement ...... 253 Capacities...... 308, 309 Genuine Vauxhall Parts Driving abroad ...... 136 Engine oil level ...... 272 and Accessories ...... 271 Handb ra ke...... 16, 209 Fuel ...... 188, 284, 285 Glov e com partment ...... 95 Haz ard warning lights ...... 131 Opening the bonnet ...... 228 Cooled ...... 143 Head restraints...... 5, 19, 55, 56 Tyre pressure...... 187, 299 Glov e com partment lighting ...... 135 Headlight flash...... 129 Vehicle data ...... 283 Bulb replacem ent ...... 263 Headlight range adjustment...... 131, 252 Windscreen wash system ...... 279 Gra phic al Inform ation Display ...... 108 Headlight switch ...... 7, 128, 129 First-aid k it, ...... 234 Gross Vehicle Weight ...... 293 Headlight wash system ...... 12, 127, 279 Flat tyre ...... 242 Headlights ...... 7 FlexOrganizer ...... 69 Daytime running lights...... 128 Fog tail light ...... 131 Driving abroad ...... 136 Bulb replacement...... 258 Front fog lights ...... 130 Footbrak e...... 208 Reversing lig hts...... 131 Front fog lights ...... 130 Wa rning device...... 126 Bulb replacement...... 258 Heated exterior mirrors ...... 13, 143 Front pa ssenger’s airbag...... 81 Heated front sea ts ...... 144 Fuel ...... 188, 284, 285 Heated rear seats ...... 144 Fuel consump tion ...... 186, 188, 287, 288 Heated rear w indow ...... 13, 143 Fuel filter...... 274 Heating ...... 140, 146, 154 Fuel gauge ...... 106 Seats...... 144 Fuel system, diesel ...... 228 With clima te control system ...... 158 Fuses ...... 246 With air conditioning system.... 150, 155 Height adjustment Seat belts ...... 76 Steering wheel ...... 6 High-pressure cleaners ...... 221, 266, 267 Horn...... 11 318 Index

I J K Identification plate ...... 282 Jack ...... 238 Keys IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 196, 198 Jump starting...... 230 Extending ...... 26 Ignition logic ...... 113, 120 Ignition lock ...... 6, 15, 27 Ignition system ...... 271, 280 Locking doors ...... 30 Imm ob iliser...... 27 Remov e ...... 16 Information display ...... 108 Starting the engine...... 6, 15, 27 Infotainm ent system ...... 137 Inspection system ...... 268 Instrument display...... 105 Instrument illum ination ...... 134 Bulb replacement...... 263 Instrument panel ...... 6 Instruments ...... 98, 105, 137 Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 196, 198 Interior mirror ...... 5, 44 Univ ersal remote control ...... 41 Interruption of power supply .. 47, 122, 125 Easytronic ...... 175 Elec tric wind ow s...... 47 Selector lever lock ...... 183 ISOFIX...... 79 Index 319

L M N Langua ge selection...... 113, 118 Main bea m...... 7, 129 Number plate lights Lashing eyes ...... 69 Bulb replacem ent ...... 254, 256 Bulb replacement ...... 261 Leather trim ...... 266 Control indicator...... 101 N um ber plate lighting ...... 261 Level control system ...... 204 Maintenance...... 268 N um ber plates...... 281 Light switch ...... 7 Air conditioning system ...... 167 Lighting ...... 7, 100, 128 Anti-freeze protec tion ...... 274 Driv ing abroad ...... 136 Brake fluid ...... 276 Loa ding ...... 223 Brakes...... 208 Loc king doors ...... 2, 30 Catalytic converter ...... 195 Loc king from the inside...... 31 Engine oil ...... 272, 273 Loc ks...... 266 Fuel consum ption ...... 187 Lub rica nts ...... 272, 283 Tyre pressure...... 213 Luggage compartment Tyres ...... 214 Bulb replacement...... 263 Windscreen wiper ...... 277 Extension ...... 65 Manua l transmission ...... 14 FlexOrga nizer...... 69 Mirrors ...... 5, 43, 44 Lashing eyes ...... 69 Misted windows ...... 13, 147, 159 Lighting ...... 135 Mobile telephone...... 139 Loading ...... 223, 293 Motorwa y lighting (AFL)...... 22, 132 Locking ...... 34 Muffler, see Exhaust system ...... 193 Safety net ...... 67 Luggage compartment cover ...... 66 Lum bar sup port ...... 51, 53 320 Index

O P Q Octane numbers...... 188, 284, 285 Pa intwork damage...... 265 Quic kheat ...... 146, 154, 158 Odometer ...... 105 Pa rking ...... 16, 202 Oil chang e...... 273 Pa rk ing distance sensors ...... 202 Oil filter change ...... 273 Pa rking lights ...... 7, 134 Oil level and consum ption ...... 272 Bulb replacem ent ...... 257 Oil pressure ...... 98 Pa rts ...... 271 Oils ...... 272 Pedals ...... 185 Operating temperature...... 185 Perform ance ...... 287, 288 Outside temperature ga uge ...... 109 Petrol ...... 188, 284, 285 Overrun...... 185, 187 Pinking ...... 188 Pollen filter ...... 166 Position mem ory...... 43, 54 Power steering, see electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering ...... 184 Preheating...... 102 Pushing, towing ...... 229 Index 321

R S Speed ...... 186 Fuel consumption ...... 186, 187 Radio ...... 137 Safeguard against unauthorised use 6, 16 Speedometer ...... 105 Radio equipment (CB)...... 139 Safety accessories ...... 77, 234 Sport mode ...... 101, 198 Radio reception ...... 137 Safety net ...... 67 Sta rter switch...... 6, 15, 27 Rain sensor...... 12, 47, 48, 127, 264, 277 Saving energy ...... 186 Sta rting the engine ...... 6, 15, 27, 229 Reading lights...... 135 Sea t adjustment ...... 3, 50, 52 Self-help ...... 229 Rear light cluster...... 128 Sea t belts ...... 72, 76, 266 Steam-jet cleaners ...... 221, 266, 267 Bulb replacement...... 258 Sea t height adjustm ent ...... 3, 51 Steering column lock ...... 6, 16 Rear window Sea t occupancy recognition ...... 87 Steering w heel a djustment ...... 6 wa sh system ...... 12, 127, 264, 279 Sea t position ...... 52, 53 Steering w heel remote control ...... 21, 137 Refuelling ...... 189 Sea ts ...... 3, 50, 51 Stowa ge c om partments ...... 57, 95, 96 Fuel filler cap ...... 188 Extending the luggage compartment 65 Sunblind ...... 49 Remote control Heated ...... 144 Sunroof...... 47 Auxiliary heating...... 165 With climate control ...... 144 Sunsha de ...... 49 Central locking system ...... 28 Selector lev er...... 169, 177 System settings...... 112, 117 Steering wheel...... 21, 137 Selector lev er lock ...... 14, 177 Univ ersal remote control ...... 41 Self-diagnosis ...... 74, 86 Replacem ent keys ...... 26 Self-help ...... 228 Reversible carpet ...... 69 Central locking system ...... 33 Reversing lights Electric sunroof ...... 49 Bulb replacement...... 258 Electric windows...... 47 Roof load ...... 71, 184, 187 Information disp la y...... 110 Roof rack ...... 187, 218 Remote c ontrol ...... 29 Running-in Serv ic e interv al display ...... 270 Bra kes ...... 208 Serv ic e work ...... 270 Side airbags ...... 83 Spare fuses...... 247 Spare keys...... 26 Spare wheel ...... 236, 238 322 Index

T Tra nsmission, automatic ...... 14 U Automatic mode...... 177 Tables...... 62 Driving programm es ...... 178 Units of mea sure ...... 113, 119 Tachometer...... 105 Fault...... 182 Unlea ded fuel ...... 188, 190, 284, 285 Tail lights ...... 128 Interruption of power supply ...... 183 Used oil ...... 273 Bulb replacement...... 258 Kic kdown ...... 180 V Tailgate ...... 34 Selector lever...... 177, 178 Tailgate wiper ...... 127 Selector lever loc k ...... 177 Valve cap k ey ...... 213 Technical d ata ...... 282 Winter programm e...... 180 Vauxhall alarm system ...... 38 Telephone, see Mobile telephone ...... 139 Tra nsmission, Easytronic ...... 168 Vauxhall Service ...... 268 Tem perature regulation...... 145, 158 Driving programm es ...... 171 Vehicle care ...... 264 Vehicle decom missioning ...... 281 Tem porary spare wheel ...... 217, 237 Interruption of power supply ...... 175 The first 600 miles...... 184 Kic kdown ...... 172 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 283 Thigh support ...... 53 Selector lever...... 14, 170 Vehicle keys, see Keys ...... 26 Tightening torque...... 242, 299 Winter programm e...... 172 Vehicle recomm issioning ...... 281 Time ...... 110, 113 Tra nsmission, m anual ...... 14 Vehicle tools ...... 238 Toll systems...... 138 Tra vel Assistant ...... 22, 58 Ventilation ...... 140, 146, 153, 160 Tools ...... 238 Tread d epth ...... 214 Towing ...... 232 Trip computer ...... 20, 114, 120 Towing eq uipm ent ...... 219 Trip odometer ...... 105 Towing eye...... 232, 233 Triple Information Display ...... 108 Trailer/caravan towing ...... 184 TSA (Trailer Sta bility Assist) ...... 225 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)...... 225 Turn lighting (AFL) ...... 22, 132 Transm ission display ...... 168, 176 Turn signal lights ...... 7 Bulb replacem ent ...... 258 Tw in Audio ...... 21, 138 Tyre c hains...... 217, 299 Tyre c ondition ...... 214 Tyre p ressure ...... 204, 213, 299 Ty re p ressure monitoring system ...... 204 Tyre repair kit ...... 242 Index 323

W X Warning buzzers...... 126 Xenon headlight system ...... 255 Warning messages ...... 111, 116 Bulb replacem ent ...... 255 Warning triangle,...... 234 Driving abroad ...... 136 Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen wash system ...... 279 Wheels, tyres ...... 211 Windows De mis ting and defrosting .... 13, 147, 150, 155, 159 Wind screen wash system ...... 12, 127 Anti-freeze protection ...... 279 Capacities...... 308, 309 Wash fluid reservoir ...... 279 Wind screen wiper ...... 11, 126, 277 Winter mode Starting -off aid ...... 172 Winter operation Battery ...... 185 Coolant, anti-freeze...... 274 Fuel consumption ...... 187 Fuel for d iesel engines...... 188 Heating ...... 140, 150, 155 Locks ...... 266 Tyre chains ...... 217, 299 Window demisting and defrosting ... 147 Windscreen wash system, anti-freeze protection...... 279 Winter programme ...... 172 Winter tyres...... 216, 299 324 Index Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, VECTRA

VECTRA 8 0 - . 7 A 0 0 - 2

7 5 uly dition: J notice. E TS 15 ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by orReproduction or in whole translation, is not in parts, without permitted Ltd. Motors Vauxhall prior consent under written rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws from Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by contained in this and specifications illustrations information, All on the latest based are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any